Project Manual

1623 342 305
moc.lrahnotelrac 90279 nogero
,tcnalrop
euneva
2522 342 305 ht8 wn 223
ER]ITCETINCRA TRAH NOTELRAC
20.64012 # boJ AHC
1102 ,32 yaM

TES DIB / TIMREP
ledomeR dnuorG
gninraeL
ytisrevinU etatS dnaltroP
yrarbiL ralliM
LAUNAM TCEJORP
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL
05/23/2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 001113 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 004113 BID FORM DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES 012400 ALLOWANCES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100.01 PROJECT INFORMATION 013100.02 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SAFETY FORM 013100.03 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 013100.04 CONSTRUCTION DIRECTIVE 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015500 CONTRACTOR PARKING 015600 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015700 CONTRACTOR STAGING 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017500 INDOOR AIR QUALITY 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 05 - METALS 054000 COLD ROLLED STEEL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 062022 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064600 WOOD TRIM DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096516 LINOLEUM 096813 TILE CARPETING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1
05/23/2011
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 105200 FIRE ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 102220 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 BASIC FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN BUILD REQUIRMENTS 210100 WATER BASED BASIC FIRE SUPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS 211300 FIRE SUPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230933 ELECTRIC / ELECTRONIC CONTROLS 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260000 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260509 EQUIPMENT WIRING 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260533 RACEWAYS 260534 BOXES 260923 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 260924 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS 262226 WIRING DEVICES 262800 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 265100 LIGHTING DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280001 BASIC ELECTRONIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM APPENDICES A TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-2
05/23/2011
OREGON UNIVERSITY SYSTEM STANDARD PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT CONTRACT BID FORM
OUS CAMPUS: PROJECT: BID CLOSING: BID OPENING:
Portland State University Millar Library Upgrades June 9, 2011, 1:00 PM Local time June 9, 2011, 1:00 PM Local time
FROM: __________________________________________________________________ Name of Contractor TO: Oregon State Board of Higher Education (campus or office name and address) ________________________________ ________________________________ The Undersigned (check one of the following and insert information requested): ____a. An individual doing business under an assumed name registered under the laws of the State of _____________________________; or ____b. A partnership registered under the laws of the State of _____________________; or ____c. A corporation organized under the laws of the State of ____________________; or
1.
____d. A limited liability corporation organized under the laws of the State of _____________________________; hereby proposes to furnish all material and labor and perform all work hereinafter indicated for the above project in strict accordance with the Contract Documents for the Basic Bid as follows: ____________________________________________ Dollars ($__________________)
and the Undersigned agrees to be bound by the following documents: Advertisement for Bids Supplemental Instructions to Bidders Public Improvement Agreement Form OUS General Conditions Prevailing Wage Rates Plans and Specifications Instructions to Bidders Bid Bond Performance Bond and Payment Bond Supplemental General Conditions Payroll and Certified Statement Form Drawings and Details
ADDENDA numbered ____ through____, inclusive (fill in blanks)
BID FORM
004113 - 1
05/23/2011
2. [OPTIONAL] The Undersigned proposes to add to or deduct from the Base Bid indicated above the items of work relating to the following Alternate(s) as designated in the Specifications: ALTERNATE #1: (description) ADD or DEDUCT: $_______________
(Continue for as many Alternates as may be necessary, or delete section if not needed. Describe how proposed Alternates, or selection of Alternates, may affect the Base Bid and award of the Contract.) 3. [OPTIONAL] The Undersigned proposes to add to or deduct from the Base Bid indicated above the items or work relating to the following Unit Price(s) as designated in the Specifications, for which any adjustments in the Contract amount will be made in accordance with Section D of the OUS General Conditions: UNIT PRICE #1 (description) ADD or DEDUCT: $_______________
(Continue for as many Unit Prices as may be necessary, or delete section if not needed. Describe how proposed Unit Prices may affect the Base Bid and award of the Contract.) 4. The work shall be completed within the time stipulated and specified in Division 1, Section ________, of the Specifications. 5. Accompanying herewith is Bid Security which is equal to ten (10) percent of the total amount of the Basic Bid.
6. The Undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to execute and deliver to the Oregon State Board of Higher Education, within twenty (20) calendar days after receiving the Contract forms, an Agreement Form, and a satisfactory Performance Bond and Payment Bond each in an amount equal to one hundred (100) percent of the Contract sum, using forms provided by the Owner. The surety requested to issue the Performance Bond and Payment Bond will be: ____________________________________________. (name of surety company - not insurance agency) The Undersigned hereby authorizes said surety company to disclose any information to the Owner concerning the Undersigned's ability to supply a Performance Bond and Payment Bond each in the amount of the Contract. 7. The Undersigned further agrees that the Bid Security accompanying the Bid is left in escrow with the Board; that the amount thereof is the measure of liquidated damages which the Owner will sustain by the failure of the Undersigned to execute and deliver the above-named Agreement Form, Performance Bond and Payment Bond, and that if the Undersigned defaults in either executing the Agreement Form or providing the Performance Bond and Payment Bond within twenty (20) calendar days after receiving the Contract forms, then the Bid Security may become the property of the Owner at the Owner's option; but if the Bid is not accepted within thirty (30) calendar days of the time set for the opening of the Bids, or if the Undersigned executes and timely delivers said Agreement Form, Performance Bond and Payment Bond, the Bid Security shall be returned. 8. The Undersigned certifies that: (1) This Bid has been arrived at independently and is being submitted without collusion with and without any agreement, understanding, or planned common course of action with any other vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the invitation to bid designed to limit independent bidding or competition; and (2) The contents of the Bid have not been communicated by the Undersigned or its employees or agents to any person not an employee or agent of the Undersigned or its surety on any Bond furnished with the Bid and will not be communicated to such person prior to the official opening of the Bid. 9. The undersigned HAS, HAS NOT (circle applicable status) paid unemployment or income taxes in Oregon within the past 12 months and HAS, HAS NOT (circle applicable status) a business address in Oregon. 10. The Undersigned agrees, if awarded a contract, to comply with the provisions of ORS 279C.800 through 279C.870 pertaining to the payment of the prevailing rates of wage.
BID FORM
004113 - 2
05/23/2011
11. Contractor's CCB registration number is ____________________________. As a condition to submitting a bid, a Contractor must be registered with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board in accordance with ORS 701.035 to 701.055, and disclose the registration number. Failure to register and disclose the number will make the bid unresponsive and it will be rejected, unless contrary to federal law. 12. The successful Bidder hereby certifies that all subcontractors who will perform construction work as described in ORS 701.005(2) were registered with the Construction Contractors Board in accordance with ORS 701.035 to 701.055 at the time the subcontractor(s) made a bid to work under the contract. 13. The successful Bidder hereby certifies that, in compliance with the Worker's Compensation Law of the State of Oregon, its Worker's Compensation Insurance provider is ______________________________, Policy No. , and that Contractor shall submit Certificates of Insurance as required. 14. Contractors Project Manager for this project is: ______________________________, Office Phone: _________________________ Cell Phone: ______________________________. 15. The Undersigned certifies that it has not discriminated against minority, women, or emerging small businesses in obtaining any subcontracts for this project. By signature below, Contractor agrees to be bound by this Bid. NAME OF FIRM _______________________________________ ADDRESS _______________________________________ _______________________________________ FEDERAL TAX ID TELEPHONE NO FAX NO SIGNATURE 1) _______________________________________ _______________________________________ _______________________________________ _______________________________________ Sole Individual _______________________________________ Partner _______________________________________ Authorized Officer of Corporation _______________________________________ Attested: Secretary of Corporation
or
2)
or (SEAL)
3)
Payment information will be reported to the IRS under the name and taxpayer ID # provided above. Information not matching IRS records could subject Contractor to 31 percent backup withholding.
*****
END
OF
BID
*****
BID FORM
004113 - 3
05/23/2011
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY THE PROJECT MANUAL AND DRAWINGS A. Work covered by the Project Manual and Drawings consists of: Millar Library - Learning Ground Portland State University, Portland Campus 1875 SW Park Avenue Portland, Oregon The work includes: At the north end of the ground floor of the library as indicated in the drawing set - removal and disposal of existing non structural gypsum partition walls. Removal and disposal of existing carpet. Removal and re-installation of a portion of the ceiling grid to re-align with the ceiling grid in the main room. Cutting an opening and installation of a new window in existing gypsum wall. Removal of existing doorway and enlarging opening. Installation of new carpet tiles, new wiring for electrical and data outlets, lighting reconfiguration. Reworking the existing mechanical system as required. Requried modifications to the fire sprinkler and fire alarm systems. Installation of light gauge metal stud partition walls with finishes and glazing. Installation of new casework. Installation of new signage. Procurement and installation of furnishings is under a separate contract. See complete list of Alternates in Section 012300. C. The Contractor shall supply all labor, transportation, apparatus, scaffolding, tools and other items necessary for the completion of the work in conformance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvements Contracts, Section A.2. The Work shall be started within ten (10) calendar days following approval of the Contractors Certificate of Insurance and the Execution of Contract by PSU Facilities, attention (fapcontracts@pdx.edu). All work shall be final completed within the time frames established in the Public Improvement Agreement Form (OUS Contract Form B-7, Item 4). Time is of an essence on this project. Failure to complete the project within the time specified will result in damages to the Owner. The Contractor will be charged liquidated damages in accordance with Item 5 of the Public Improvement Agreement Form (OUS Contract Form B-7). Liquidated damages will be deducted from the Contractors Final Payment Request.
B.
D.
1.2
CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES A. Contractor shall limit use of the Premises for Work and storage to allow for: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Owner and tenant occupancy of adjacent spaces, day and night Public use, day and night Security Safe entry and exit for vehicles and pedestrians
Access through the interior of the building will be coordinated with the Owners Authorized Representative.
1.3
PROTECTIONS
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
05/23/2011
A.
Protect interior existing terrazzo flooring, gypsum walls and entry glass, sidewalks, asphalt paving, concrete, trees, shrubs, and lawn areas at all times from spillage of materials used in carrying out the Work. Prevent materials from clogging sinks, catch basins and yard drains; maintain drains clean and in proper working conditions. Dumping of plaster, solvents, or other injurious materials in PSU plumbing systems is not permitted. Costs of cleaning or repair will be withheld from Contractor as required. Clean, repair, resurface, or restore existing surfaces to their original, or better, condition, or completely replace such surfaces to match existing, where damaged by construction operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages as specified in OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section G.1.1.. The Owner will not be responsible for protection of materials or equipment from vandalism or theft. Security is the responsibility of the Contractor. See Section 015000Temporary Facilities. Debris shall not be allowed to remain around the buildings during performance of Work, and shall be disposed of daily and/or as directed by Owners Authorized Representative. The Contractor shall manage a safe job environment for both the safety of all people around the Premises as well as the safety of the Owners and general publics property. Do not store materials where they will interfere with operations of Owner. Storage areas must be approved by the Owners Authorized Representative prior to start of the Work.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner and building tenants will occupy the Premises during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. Cooperate and coordinate with Owners Authorized Representative in construction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate the Owners usage, especially in the following areas: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Restricted access and parking Use of elevators and stairs Temporary storage space availability Provide a written schedule of Work specifying where and when Work will be accomplished Notify Owners Authorized Representative a minimum of 72 hours prior to performing any work that will release strong odors or fumes, causes noise, or requires windows to be closed during hot weather. See Section 01734 for additional Indoor Air Quality requirement, which includes coordination of noise abatement.
B.
Conduct operations in such a way to ensure the least inconvenience to University staff, students and the general public. To maintain continual operations by the Owner and building tenants, evening and/or weekend work by the Contractor will be required for short durations at various stages of the Project. Coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance to performing evening or weekend work.
C.
1.5
SALVAGE A. All material indicated to be removed shall become the property of the Contractor except those items noted on the drawings and in the specifications as being retained by the Owner. All locksets, cylinders and strikes removed shall be returned to Owner. Coordinate with Owners 011000 - 2
B. SUMMARY
05/23/2011
Authorized Representative. C. The City of Portland has mandated the recycling of demolition materials. See Section 017419 of these Specifications for Waste Management requirements, which includes recycling documentation to be provided to the Architect and Owner by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, materials and equipment removed from existing construction shall not be used in the completed Work. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work or salvaged to Owner: 1. 2. 3. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper function in the completed Work. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products that require off-site storage, restoration or renovation. Pay all costs for such Work. Contractor shall be responsible for removing and reinstalling mechanical units, vents, guys, antennae, and electrical and grounding wires or conduits.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Inspect existing conditions, Work requirements, and the Contract Documents. Verify that materials and equipment being furnished meet requirements specified. Report any discrepancies to the Owners Authorized Representative prior to proceeding with work.
3.2
MATERIAL HANDLING A. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, cranes, hoists, towers, or other lifting devices are necessary for the proper and efficient movement of materials, comply with these requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use only experienced personnel Remove equipment as soon as possible after task is ended Coordinate the placement of such equipment with the Owners Authorized Representative to ensure that utility tunnels, utilities, and surfaces are not damaged. Obtain required permits and meet the requirements of governing authorities regarding street and sidewalk closures, safety, noise, and other applicable regulations. Provide barricades and warning ribbons to close off areas temporarily for loading and unloading, to insure public safety.
B. 3.3
Contractor shall not allow any materials or debris to free-fall from the building.
WORKMANSHIP A. Unless otherwise specified, perform the Work using workers skilled in the particular type of Work involved. Should the Owner or the Architect, in writing, deem anyone on the Work incompetent or unfit for the assigned duties, dismiss the worker immediately or reassign that worker to a different task 011000 - 3
B.
SUMMARY
05/23/2011
requiring a lesser degree of competence. C. Workmanship shall be first class in every respect as determined by the Owners Authorized Representative and Architect, and all Work performed shall be performed in accordance with standard industry practice. The Contractor shall maintain effective supervision on the project at all times Work is being performed. The Superintendent shall be the same person throughout the course of the Work, and shall attend the pre-construction conference.
D.
3.4
TESTING A. The Owner reserves the right to perform any testing as may be required to determine compliance with the Project Manual and Drawings. Costs for such testing will be the Owners responsibility unless testing indicates noncompliance. Costs for testing which indicates noncompliance shall be borne by the Contractor. Non-complying Work shall be corrected and testing will be repeated until the Work complies with the Project Manual and Drawings. Contractor will pay costs for retesting non-complying Work. The Contractor shall cooperate in every respect with the activities of the testing agency.
B.
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY
011000 - 4
5/23/2011
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work of the Section includes administrative and procedural requirements to the Bid Alternates of the OUS Bid Form (OUS Form B-6).
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional information regarding bid alternates and changes in scope may be found in the follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. OUS Bid Form Instructions to Bidders OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
DEFINITION A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Project Manual that may be added or deducted from the Basic Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation method. The cost change for each alternate is the net addition to or deletion from the Basic Bid to incorporate the alternate into the work. No other adjustments are made to the Basic Bid, unless stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders or the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATIVES 3.1 The Owners initial intent is to contract for all work of the Basic Bid. All required bonding, deposits, securities or guarantees required by the Contract Documents shall be based on the Basic Bid amount. Alternates quoted on the Bid Form will be reviewed and may be rejected, accepted individually, in combination or entirely at the Owners Option. Alternates to the Basic Bid will be executed by a Change Order, in accordance with Division 1 Section 013100 and the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section D. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required to complete the alternative work and surrounding modifications whether or not mentioned as part of the work. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the work of each alternative. A Schedule of Bid Alternates is provided at the end of this Section. Refer to other Specification Sections of this Project Manual for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5 3.6
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
5/23/2011
PART 4 - SCHEDULE OF BID ALTERNATES 4.1 The following Alternates may be deducted and/or added from the Work of the Base Bid:
1.
Alternative No. 1: Deduct for the Sandbox Area Site Built Version / Add the cost for a nonstructural wall system. Provide a deduct for the site built version of the Sandbox Area as shown in the drawing set. Include a cost for a non-structural wall system. See Division 10 Demountable Partitions Deduct Alternative No. 2 Deduct for Productivity Area Computer Tables: Provide a deduct for the site built version of the productivity area computer tables along the north window wall as shown on Detail A5.04/7, Computer Table Add Alternative No. 3: Provide a Cost for Solid Surface Countertop Material in Lieu of Plastic Laminate at Details Indicated: Provide solid surface counter top at detail A7.02/8, Help Desk Provide solid surface countertop at detail A7.02/10, Lap Top Tables Add Alternate No. 4: Provide Additional Lap Top Tables: Provide an added cost to include additional lap top tables to the South of the entry as indicated on the drawings.
2.
3.
4.
END OF SECTION
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
05/23/2011
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
B.
Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances.
C.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances.
1.3 A.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
B.
C.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.
B.
C.
ALLOWANCES
012400 - 1
05/23/2011
1.5 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.
1.6 A.
LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.
3.3 A.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Allowance No. 1: Signage 1. Amount: $7,500
END OF SECTION 012400
ALLOWANCES
012400 - 2
5/23/2011
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION A. B. Work of this Section includes procedures for progress payments. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. For the primary discussion of payments, refer to Article E of OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts and Supplemental General Condition SG-3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATION FORMS A. For applications for payment, use AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, supported by AIA Document G702a, Continuation Sheet. Prepare the Schedule of Values in such a manner that each major item of Work and each subcontracted item of Work is shown as a line item costs broken down to correspond to the project construction schedule as detailed in Article H.2.1 of the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts on AIA Document G702a, Application and Certification of Payment, Continuation Sheet. The Continuation Sheet shall be the minimum Schedule of Values breakdown.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PAYMENTS A. The Owner will make progress payments on the account of the Contract once a month, based on the value of Work accomplished or materials on the Premises, as stated in the Schedule of Values on the Application and Certificate for Payment. Complete and forward three (3) copies of the Application and Certificate for Payment to the Architect by the 20th day of each month. Payments will be made on protected materials on hand on the Premises properly stored, protected, and insured. Estimated quantities shall be subject to the Architect's review and judgment.
B.
END OF SECTION
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 1
5/23/2011
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL` 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating contract documentation, communications and construction operations. The requirements of this Section relate to all work by the Contractor and Sub-contractors performing work under these Contract documents including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 1.2 Pre-construction Coordination Identification of Owners Authorized Representatives Identification of Architect Listing of Sub-contractors Contractor Emergency Contact Information Safety & Emergency Procedures Unforeseen Hazardous Materials Permits and Fees Key Requests Progress Meetings Requests for Clarifications & Information Construction Directives Construction Change Orders
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. Additional requirements related to Project Coordination may be found in the following: 1. 2. 3. Instructions to Bidders OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A pre-construction conference shall predate the Work and shall include but not be limited to the following agenda: 1. 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Contract management and communication requirements Emergency phone numbers Record maintenance requirements Work schedule Schedule of values Submittal schedule Early purchase, long lead items and owner procurements Multiple contract coordination Maintenance of access and use of the premises Traffic control, parking and contractors use of the job site 013100 - 1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
5/23/2011
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Hazardous materials Job site safety Job site inspection & observation requirements Review of contract documents Progress meetings other subjects of interest desired by the Contractor, Architect, Owners Authorized Representative(s), Manufacturers Representatives, and other participants.
B.
Refer to Division 1, Section 013300 for submittals required prior to the pre-construction conference. Coordinate all operations with the Owners Authorized Representative during the construction period. Submit to the Owners Authorized Representative for approval, a schedule of Values for the Work to be performed; schedule of values shall include project and building name, when the Work is to begin, and estimated duration of the Work. The Schedule of Values is to be provided to the Owners Authorized Representative in accordance with OUS Supplemental General Condition SG-3. Submit to the Owners Authorized Representative for approval, a schedule for the Work to be performed; schedule shall include project and building name, when the Work is to begin, and estimated duration of the Work. The Schedule is to be provided to the Owners Authorized Representative in accordance with OUS Supplemental General Condition SG-5. The schedule shall be specific as to which portion of the Work is taking place on a particular day. Prior to start of any work, Contractor shall provide at the pre-construction meeting an emergency responsible person/contact list on a 24-hour, 7 day a week basis for any emergency issue that may arise in connection with this project. Contractor must reissue the list any time the responsible person(s) changes. Issue to Owners Authorized Representative. See Project Information Sheet provided herein. Parking will not be provided on the premises. See Section 015000 Temporary Facilities. Schedule elevator usage with the Owners Representative a minimum of 72 hours in advance so as not to inconvenience the public.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G. H.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION OF OWNERS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owners Project Manager and the Owners Field Construction Manager (Jointly the Owners Authorized Representative or his designee) will be appointed by the Owner and identified at the Pre-construction meeting. The Owners Authorized Representative in conjunction with the Architect will provide coordination during construction and on-site observation. See Project Information Sheet provided herein.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT A. The Owner has contracted with Carleton Hart Architecture to prepare construction documents and assist in Owners Authorized Representative in the coordination of the construction project. See Project Information Sheet provided herein.
3.4
LISTING OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
013100 - 2
5/23/2011
A.
Provide to the Owners Authorized Representative at the pre-construction conference three (3) copies of list of sub-contractors anticipated to perform work on the project. Provide on the list of sub-contractors: subcontractors name, contact person, mailing address and telephone number. Substitution shall be permitted only with the approval of the Owners Authorized Representative.
3.5
CONTRACTOR EMERGENCY CONTACT INFORMATION A. Provide to the Owners Authorized Representative at the pre-construction conference Contractor Emergency Contact telephone numbers. See Project Information Sheet provided herein.
3.6
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a safe job site at all time, until the Owner takes possession. The Contractor shall comply with all safety regulations, and for enforcing compliance with all safety regulations and procedures by all workers, sub-contractors and visitors on the site. Refer to Division 1, Section 015000 for minimal temporary facilities required for job site safety. The Contractor shall provide procedures and additional temporary facilities as required. The Contractor shall maintain indoor air quality and noise control standards specified in Division 1, Section 017500. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Owners Authorized Representative, at the preconstruction conference the Construction Project Safety Form provided herein.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
UNFORESEEN HAZARDOUS MATERIAL A. Asbestos: The Owner has exercised due diligence in the identification and removal of asbestos containing materials from the work area. Prior to each phase of construction the Contractor shall confirm the non-existence of asbestos containing materials in the work area prior to proceeding. If the Contractor identifies materials suspected of containing asbestos, he shall immediately stop work in that area of the job site and proceed in accordance with Division 1, Section 017419, Item 3.1(F). Lead Paint: The Owner has exercised due diligence in the identification and removal of lead paint from the work area. Prior to each phase of construction the Contractor shall confirm the nonexistence of materials coated with lead based paint in the work area prior to proceeding, as required in accordance with OSHA Directive CPL 2-2.58. If lead based paint materials are suspected, the contractor shall immediately notify the Owners Authorized Representative and proceed in accordance with OSHA Standards and Directives. If required an adjustment in the Contract Sum and Contract Time will be made through Execution of a Contract Change Order in Accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section D.1.3(c).
B.
3.8
PERMITS & FEES A. The Millar Library LGIT remodel is enrolled in the city of Portlands Facilities Permit Program. See OUS Standard General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. The Owner shall provide Building, Electrical, Mechanical and Plumbing permits for buildings in accordance with OUS Supplemental Condition SG-2. If the Contractor needs to block a portion of the right-of-way, the Contractor must secure the proper permits from the City of Portland and shall give all requisite notices to public authorities. The Contractor shall be responsible for all violations of the law for any cause in connection with the Work or caused by obstructing streets or sidewalks. 013100 - 3
B.
5/23/2011
C.
The Contractor shall provide proper notice to all governing jurisdictions including but not limited to the Oregon Department of Environmental Quality prior to beginning work. Contractor shall pay for and document Oregon Bureau of Labor and Industries fees as required by Bureau of Labor & Industry.
D.
3.9
KEY REQUESTS A. Keys will be provided to the Contractor as required for access to buildings and work areas. There is a deposit of $100.00 required for each key given to the Contractor. Contractor shall fill out Contractors key request form and deliver for approval to Project Manager a minimum of 48 hours in advance. This deposit will be refunded upon return of the key(s.) Keys will not be provided to sub-contractors, nor will Facilities open locked doors for Contractors employees or subcontractors. Contractor shall provide and coordinate all such requirements.
3.10
PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The contractor shall schedule for the contractors Project Manager and Field Superintendent to attend weekly Progress Meetings with the Architect and the Owners Authorized Representative. The contractor shall coordinate and assure the attendance of sub-contractors as required by the agenda and the Owners Authorized Representative. Weekly Progress Meetings shall be held each(day and time), following the pre-construction conference and continuing through substantial completion and until final completion. The Owners Authorized Representative may require additional on-site `tail-gate meetings as necessary to resolve construction related issues and facilitate continued progress. Progress meetings shall be held at: PSU, Office of Facilities 202 University Services Building 617 SW Montgomery D. The progress meeting minutes serve as the official communication between all parties involved in the Project. The Contractor shall: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Prepare agendas. Record minutes and include decisions. Record attendance Distribute minutes to attendees within three (3) calendar days after meetings.
B.
C.
Minimum agenda shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Review and approve minutes of previous meetings. Review work progress and work schedule since previous meeting. Discuss field observations, problems, clarifications and information required. Review delivery schedules, identify problems that could impede planned progress. Review proposed changes in construction or procedures. Delivery and discussion of submittals. Submittal of progress payment requests for review. Other items as may be required.
3.11
REQUESTS FOR CLARIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION 013100 - 4
5/23/2011
A.
Throughout the course of work, the Contractor may require clarifications or additional information from the Architect or Owners Authorized Representative. This information may include but not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Clarifications whether specific work is within the scope of an item of work and no Contract adjustment is anticipated. Clarifications or interpretations of information or directions provided in the Contact Documents, for which no Contract adjustment is anticipated. Clarifications or directions as a result of unforeseen conditions, which may or may not result in adjustments to the Contact Sum or days allowed for contact completion. Additional details or information needed for construction, which were not originally included in the contract documents, which may or may not result in adjustments to the Contact Sum or days allowed for contact completion.
B.
The contractors field superintendent shall be the principle generator of requests for clarification and information (RFIs) as a result of field operations and conditions. Three copies of requests for clarifications and information (RFI) shall be typed and submitted in accordance with the communication process described in Section 013300. All RFIs shall be sequentially numbered and include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Project item information as specified in Section 013300, Item 1.5. Reason for request, and clarification and information requested. Work impacted by request for clarification or information. Drawings or sketches as necessary. Contractors recommendations as appropriate. Signature and date by contractors authorized representative.
C.
D.
E.
If the contractor anticipates that a change in the scope of work may be necessary in conjunction with a request for clarification or information, he may submit with the request a proposal to perform additional work as a Contract Change Order as specified herein. No changes in work shall commence without an approved RFI response, Construction Directive or Executed Contract Change Order. All RFI Responses will be by the Architect through and with the approval of the Owners Authorized Representative. Response time to process RFIs shall be seven (7) calendar days from the date received by the Architect, to allow reasonable time for researching the question and preparing a response. If, due to unavoidable circumstances, information is needed immediately, coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative who will attempt to expedite a response by FAX or e-mail. When responses are expedited, an RFI must still be submitted as a confirmation of the communication prior to submitting for progress payment for the related work. A log and copies of all RFIs shall be maintained in the jobsite office, for review or reference by the Contractor, Architect and Owners Authorized Representative.
F.
G.
H.
3.12
CONSTRUCTION DIRECTIVES A. Construction Directives may be initiated by the Owners Authorized Representative, or the Architect on approval of the Owners Authorized representative, and provides interpretations of the contract documents or orders minor changes in the work, which may require changes in the 013100 - 5
5/23/2011
Contract Sum or Contract Time, which would be subsequently executed through a Construction Change Order. Interpretation of the Contract documents shall be in accordance with OUS General conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section A.3, and as amended by the OUS Supplemental General Conditions. Construction Directives are not Construction Change Orders. If the Contractor believes the work described in a Construction Directive requires a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, he shall submit a proposal to perform additional work as a Construction Change Order as specified herein. Do not proceed with Construction Order work until a proposal for Change Order work has been submitted and directed to proceed by the Owners Authorized Representative. Proceeding without authorization waives the Contractors claim for additional Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. 3.13 Construction Directives shall be executed using the attached Construction Directive form.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDERS A. Contract Bid award is based on the Base Bid. Additional work may be authorized by amending the Contract based upon Unit Prices provided in the Bid Form, the Contractors Schedule of Values, or other Contractor Proposals approved by the Owners Authorized Representative, and in accordance with Section D of the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts. A Construction Change Order is a written order issued after the execution of a contract, which authorizes and directs a change in scope of work and an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or both. Change Orders will be processed using AIA Document 701, and is not complete until all signatures have been obtained and a signed copy is received by the Contractor. A Contract Change Order request can be initiated by the Owners Authorized Representative through a proposal request to the Contractor, or by the Contractor through submittal of a proposal request in conjunction with a RFI response or Construction Directive. The Contractors proposal for Contract Change Order Work shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. E. Project item information as specified in Section 013300, Item 1.5. Reason for request Itemized statement of required materials and equipment, including adjustments to adjacent and dependent work. Itemized statement of required labor, including adjustments to adjacent and dependent work. Total Contract Sum adjustment required for the Change in Work. Total Contract Time adjustment required for the Change in Work. Additional Documentation as required to support the request. Signature and date by contractors authorized representative.
B.
C.
D.
Construction Change Order work shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owners Authorized Representative and executed in accordance with OUS General conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section D, and as amended herein. If a fair and reasonable Contract Change Order adjustment cannot be agreed upon, the Owners Authorized Representative may in writing direct the Contractor to proceed with the Change in Work on a `Time and Materials basis in accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts.
F.
END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6
05/23/2011
PORTLAND STATE UNIVERSITY

OFFICE OF FACILITIES
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name: Millar Library LGIT Remodel Project No:
Project Description: Remodel Existing Computer Lab, Install new Sandbox area. Project Address: Project Manager: Millar Library Kay Byrne Phone: (503) 725-8937 Francis McBride Work Start Date: FAX: Phone: (503) 725- 8944 Phone: 503-206-3181
Project Site Construction Manager:
Design Consultant: Carleton Hart Architecture Address: 322 NW 8th Avenue E-Mail : scott.palmer@carletonhart.com Bid Opening Date: Contract Execution Date: Notice to Proceed Date: Final Contract Completion Date: Contractor Name: Project Manager: Contractor Office Address: E-Mail: On Site Construction Office Address: Site E-Mail: Site Superintendent: Cell: Cell:
FAX: 503-243-3261 Contract Bid Price: Pre-Const. Meeting: Contract Calendar Days: Liquidated Damages: NA Office Phone: Pager:
Office FAX: Site Phone: Site FAX: Pager:
Contractors Emergency & Weekend Phone: 1. 2. 3.
PROJECT INFORMATION
013100.01 - 1
SU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL
5/23/2011

CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SAFETY FORM INSTRUCTIONS

The purpose of the Construction Project Safety Form is to allow contractors to plan the construction or remodeling project in such a way as to prevent injuries and protect the environment. This form will need to be filled out by the Contractor and provided to the Owners Authorized Representative at the preconstruction conference. The information provided on the form will be reviewed at the preconstruction conference. All projects must be planned with safety consideration for people who will be in contact with the area; in particular, sight, hearing, or mobility impaired people who are not covered under OSHA regulations but are covered under general liability issues. PSU requires that all contractors and subcontractors come to the job trained in all Occupational Safety and Health ACT (OSHA) Standards applicable to their work process. This information is outlined in the OR-OSHA document Occupational Hazards Common to Construction & Remodeling Activities. This document can be obtained free of charge by contacting the OR-OSHA Resource Center at 1-800-922-2689 or on-line at www.OROSHA.org. All construction and remodeling activities regardless of size and/or scope must be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise protected (isolated) to restrict entrance and to ensure the safety of those in the general area. All building materials and equipment need to be placed within the isolation enclosure. Any open trenches outside the isolated space will need to be fenced or covered with approved cover (contact the Owners Authorized Representative for specifics). REQUIRED PROJECT ISOLATION AND BARRICADING OPEN TRENCHES FOR OUTSIDE CONSTRUCTION SITES Construction projects that involve building a facility, any exterior remodel, any excavation, or demolition, at a minimum, will install the following perimeter isolation: A six foot chain-link fence, with controlled access points, extending in all directions around the excavation or building site such that no area of the construction is accessible to pedestrians or unauthorized personnel or vehicles. Note: At the Universitys option, other barricading plans may be accepted. These may apply to projects such as road resurfacing, parking lot striping, exterior building water proofing, etc. Typical temporary construction fencing shall be covered with opaque material to prevent seeing inside the fencing. Construction fencing shall be placed on the interior side of the opaque material. Also see Section 015700 (Contractor Staging) Indoor projects which will create dust (cutting sheetrock, sanding, sawing etc.) are subject to the following: 1. Areas where existing doors can provide isolation will be labeled Construction Area Authorized Personnel Only. 2. All other areas will be isolated by a solid barrier. The minimum barrier allowed is 4 mil poly sheeting.
Any excavation across or adjacent to sidewalks or pathways which must be left open overnight, must be identified with working, blinking, construction lights in addition to being covered.
The contractor will provide all trench covering and fencing material, PSU will not provide any materials.
CONTRACTOR STAGING
013100.02 - 1
5/23/2011
Portland State University OFFICE OF FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SAFETY FORM Complete and deliver with the Project Information sheet to the Owners Authorized Representative at the PreConstruction Conference. Meeting Date: __________________ Time: _________________ Location: ________________ Project: ___________________________________________ Job #: ______________________ Contractor: ____________________________ Start: _________________ Completion: _______ Contractor Foreman: ___________________________ PSU Project Mgr: _____________________________ Emergency Fire/Medical.Security #: 911 Non-Emergency Campus Safety (503) 725-4407
Confined Space to be accessed? Y or N Location: ___________________________________ If yes, review confined space program with PSU Project Manager Welding or hot work to be done? Y or N If yes, describe extinguisher, and fire watch, plan: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ MSDS copies to be on the job site and copies available to PSU Project Manager. Lead paint involved? Y or N Contact PSU Health and Safety Supervisor (503) 725-8458
Describe hazard mitigation plan: _______________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Asbestos involved? Y or N If yes, Contact PSU Health and Safety Supervisor (503) 725-8458 Hazard Waste Plan developed? Y or N Containers: ________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Storage Loc: _____________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ In the event of suspected hazardous materials or spill contact PSU Health and Safety Supervisor (503) 725-8458or Cell # (503) 888-0189.
Describe hazmat spill plan: _______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Will there be any open trenches or holes? Y or N Describe plan to barricade: ____________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Internal combustion engines? Y or N If yes, is CO monitoring required? Y N
Other air contaminates? Y or N If yes, describe: ___________________________________ CONTRACTOR STAGING 013100.02 - 2
5/23/2011
Building air intake & return air locations: ____________________________________________ (No chemical compounds to be used near functioning intake or return air locations.) Material deliver or parking creating hazard? Y or N If yes, describe minimization plan: ____ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ No vehicle is allowed to park on sidewalk entrances/exits to steam tunnel (metal hatch cover). Dust created? Y or N If yes, describe control plan: _________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Noise sources? List: ____________________________________________________________ Describe noise control methods: ___________________________________________________ Crane to be used? Y or N If yes, describe plan: ____________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ (Loads will not be moved over or suspended above pedestrian occupied areas) Exterior chute to be used? Y or N If yes describe plan: ______________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________
Construction area to be fenced? Y or N Type & location: _____________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Fence to be locked? Y or N Job Trailer on site? Y or N to Security Services dispatch and PSU Project Manager To be locked? Y or N All contractor lock keys
Building exitways to be blocked or restricted at any time? Y or N If yes, describe ADA alternate routes and overall egress plan: _____________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Will project create interior hazards to building occupants? Y or N If yes, describe hazards and minimization plan: __________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Lock changes planned? Y or N If yes, describe location and responsible party: ________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR STAGING
013100.02 - 3
5/23/2011

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

Project: __________________________________________ RFI No.: _____________________ Contractor: _______________________________________ Date submitted: _______________ Subcontractor: ____________________________________ Date info reqd: _______________ Supplier: _________________________________________ Provide all information required by Specification Division I Section 013100. Attach additional sheets as required. Request:
Contractor Response:
Date
Architect Acknowledgement by Owners Rep.
Date Date
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
013100.03 - 1
5/23/2011

CONSTRUCTION DIRECTIVE
Project: __________________________________________ Directive No.: ________________ Contractor: _______________________________________ Date submitted: _______________ Subcontractor: ____________________________________ Date info reqd: _______________ Supplier: _________________________________________ You are hereby directed to execute promptly this Directive which interprets the Contract Documents or orders minor changes in the work. If you consider that a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time is required, submit an itemized change order proposal as required by Specification Division I Section 013100. If your proposal is in order, this Directive will be superseded by a Change Order. Description:
Architect: ______________________________________________________ Date: __________ Owners Authorized Rep: _________________________________________ Date: __________
CONSTRUCTION DIRECTIVE
013100.04 - 1
5/23/2011
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. The requirements specified in this Section relate to Submittal materials, Requests for Information and Requests for Clarification by all Contractors, Sub-contractors and Suppliers performing Work under these Contract Documents and includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.2 Submittal Procedures Submittals Schedule Proposed Products List Shop Drawings Product Data Samples Manufacturers Instructions Manufacturers Operations & Maintenance Manuals Manufacturers Certificates
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. Additional submittal requirements may be provided as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Instructions to Bidders OUS General Conditions Supplemental General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
All Submittals, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall be in accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section B.18 as amended by the Supplemental General Conditions and as specified herein. Transmit six (6) copies of each submittal with sequentially numbered forms. Provide two (2) additional copies when submittal involves mechanical or electrical review. Re-submittals shall have original number and alphabetic prefix. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification numbers, as appropriate. Review of the submittals by the Architect and Owners Authorized Representative shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations as specified in OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section B.18. The General Contractor shall sign certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work and coordination of information, is in accordance with the work of the Contract Documents. Provide space for review approval by Architect and the Owners Authorized Representative, as specified herein. Schedule submittals to expedite Project; deliver to Architect and Owners Authorized Representative as directed herein and coordinate submission of related items.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
5/23/2011
PART 2 - SUBSEQUENT TO THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT 2.1 Seventy-two (72) hours prior to the pre-construction conference and in all cases prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Owners Authorized Representative: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 2.2 Certificate of Insurance as required. Signed Public Improvement Agreement. Five (5) original copies of Performance & Payment Bonds. Schedule of Values. Project Construction Schedule. Submittal List and Schedule of Submittals, identifying long lead items. Contractor Emergency Contact Information.
Prepare Schedule of Submittals in chronological order by date of required submittal approval. Indicate the following: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Category of submittal. Name of sub-contractor or supplier. Generic Description of Work covered. Related Specification Section Number. Activity or event number on the project construction schedule. Proposed submittal date for first submittal. Date material required for installation. Re-submittal dates and final release or approval by Architect and Owners Authorized Representative.
PART 3 - DURING CONSTRUCTION 3.1 The general Submittal Review Procedure is illustrated in the following diagram. A. Sub-contractor and/or Supplier submits to General Contractor for review/ approval If approved, General Contractor submits to Architect for review/ approval. Architect submits to Design Team Consultants for review/ approval. If approved, Architect Submits to PSU Project Manager for review/ approval. If approved, PSU Project Manager submits to PSU Field Representative for approval and delivery to General Contractors Project Representative. 013300 - 2 Sub &/or Supplier General Contractor Architect PSU Proj. Manager PSU Field Rep. General Contractor Sub &/or Supplier Consultants
B.
C.
D.
E.
5/23/2011
3.2
Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for submittal review by Architect and Owners Authorized Representative. Allow (3) additional calendar days for mechanical and electrical reviews. The General Contractor shall be responsible for timely the submittal of materials approvals in order to satisfy required delivery dates and maintain the construction schedule. ACTION BY ARCHITECT AND OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly through and with approval of the Owners Authorized Representative. All unacceptable or rejected submittals shall be immediately corrected and resubmitted for review. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "No Exceptions Taken," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Make Corrections Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender without action.
3.3
B.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
The Owners Representative may request additional information during the course of the project to monitor material and equipment deliveries as well as coordinate work and materials by others. The General Contractor may be required to submit and periodically update a Material Delivery Summary indicating material order dates, purchase order numbers, expected delivery dates and actual delivery dates. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents as the basis of Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Dimensions. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.
3.5
B.
Subsequent to Substantial Completion and prior to Final Pay Request, Submit five (5) copies of As Built documentation of all shop drawings to the Architect for inclusion in Project Record Documents. See OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section K and Division 1 Section 017700 for Project Closeout requirements. 013300 - 3
5/23/2011
3.6
PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. Compliance with trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. Notation of coordination requirements.
4.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. Submittals: Submit 6 copies of each required submittal; submit 2 additional copies where review is required by Architects consultants. Up to four copies will be retained by Architect and Owner, plus copies by Architects consultant, the remaining copies will returned marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. a. b. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
3.7
SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following: a. b. c. 2. Specification Section number and reference. Product name or name of the manufacturer. Compliance with recognized standards.
Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. 013300 - 4
b.
5/23/2011
3.
4.
Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three sets. The Architect will return two sets marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. b. c. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work.
3.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
B.
C.
Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
3.9
MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, start-up, testing, adjusting and finishing. Submit any conflicts between the manufacturers instructions and the Contract Documents for clarification by the Architect and Owners Authorized Representative.
B.
3.10
MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATE A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers certificate for review, in quantities specified. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specific requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certificates as appropriate. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on materials or products, but must be acceptable to the Architect and the Owners Authorized Representative.
B.
C.
PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION A. The requirements specified in this Section relate to general quality control of the Project and supplement the quality control requirements specified in the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts and other Sections of these Specifications. The requirements of this Section relate to all work performed by all Contractors and Sub-contractors performing work under these Contract Documents and include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. References and standards. Quality assurance submittals. Mock-ups. Control of installation. Tolerances. Testing and inspection services. Manufacturers' field services.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Additional requirements related to Quality Requirements may be provided as follows: 1. 2. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of the specifications.
1.3
REFERENCES A. B. ASTM C 1021 -Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 1997. ASTM C 1077 -Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2000. ASTM C 1093 -Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry; 1995. ASTM D 3740 -Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 1999c. ASTM E 329 -Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 2000b. ASTM E 543 Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 1999. ASTM E 548 Standard Guide for General Criteria used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence; 1994.
C. D.
E. F. G. H.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
5/23/2011
1. 2.
Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
B.
Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of the report to the Contractor and additional copies to the Architect and Owners Authorized Representative for processing through the procedure specified in Section 013100. All test reports shall include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Date issued. Project title and number. Name of inspector. Date and time of sampling or inspection. Identification of product and specifications section. Location In the Project. Type of test/inspection. Date of test/inspection. Results of test/inspection. Conformance with Contract Documents. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.
C.
D.
Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect and Owners Authorized Representative, in accordance with the procedure specified in Section 013100. All certificates shall include the following information: 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to the Architect and Owner.
2.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for review by Architect and Owners Authorized Representative. 1. 2. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
F.
G.
Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for review and approval by Architect and Owners Authorized Representative, in accordance with the procedure specified in Section 013300. 1. Submit information for the limited purpose of assessing quality control, and conformance with the design concept and contract documents.
014000 - 2
5/23/2011
1.5
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
B.
C. D.
E.
1.6
TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Unless otherwise directed in writing by the Owners Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall make arrangements for all required testing and inspections in accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section B.7. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Employed Agency shall comply with the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 548, ASTM E 543, .ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM 03740, ASTM E329, and ASTM E548. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
B.
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. 014000 - 3
B. C.
5/23/2011
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
E. F.
G.
3.2
MOCK-UPS A. When required by other Sections of these specifications or the Architect provide mock-ups for review of conformance with quality, performance and design intent. Review of mock-ups will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.
B.
C.
D. E.
3.3
TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
B.
C. 3.4
TESTING AND INSPECTION A. B. See individual specification sections for testing required. Testing Agency Duties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect or Owners Authorized Representative. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 014000 - 4
5/23/2011
1. 2. 3. 4. D.
Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of the Contract Documents. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
Contractor Responsibilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. Provide incidental labor and facilities: To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. To facilitate tests/inspections. To provide storage and curing of test samples. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re-testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price.
3.5
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect and Owners Authorized Representative 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. 2. C. Observer subject to approval of Architect. Observer subject to approval of Owner.
B.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.6
DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Immediately replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
014000 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION: A. The requirements specified in this Section relate to Temporary Facilities, Controls, Utilities and procedures required by all Sub-contractors through the General Contractor performing work under these Contract Documents and includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. General Requirements for Temporary Facilities and Controls. Temporary Utilities. Temporary Electricity. Temporary Lighting. Temporary Heat. Temporary Ventilation. Temporary Telephone and Fax. Temporary Water Service. Temporary Sanitary Facilities. Temporary Fire Protection and Detection. Temporary Construction. Temporary Controls. Tree and Plant Protection. Security. Traffic Regulation and Parking. Project Identification. Field Office. Progress Cleaning Removal of Utilities, Facilities and Controls
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. Additional requirements related Temporary Facilities and Controls may be provided as follows: 1. 2. 3. OUS General Conditions Supplemental General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
GENERAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. This section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including such items as temporary utility services, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary controls, traffic regulations, project security and protection. Cost or usage charges for temporary services or facilities are NOT chargeable to Owner, and will NOT be considered as basis for claim for change orders. Temporary utility services required for use at the Project Site include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. Water service and distribution. Temporary electric power and lighting. Telephone, Fax and e-mail service.
B.
C.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
5/23/2011
D.
Temporary construction and support facilities required for Project include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Temporary heat. Temporary ventilation. Sanitary facilities. Waste disposal service. Construction aids and miscellaneous general services and facilities. Temporary enclosures. Project identification, bulletin boards and signs. Field office. Parking
E.
Security and protection facilities and services required for Project include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. Temporary fire protection. Barricades, warning signs and lights. Environmental protection.
F.
Comply with requirements of local laws and regulations as well as Owner's requirements governing construction, and local industry standards, in installation and maintenance of temporary services and facilities, including but not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Building codes, including local requirements for permits, testing and inspection. Health and safety regulations. Utility company regulations and recommendations for temporary services. Police and Fire Department rules and recommendations. Environmental Protection Agency regulations ad requirements. Hazardous Materials Safety Regulations.
G.
Comply with requirements of NFPA Code 241, "Standards for Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations" and ANSI -A 10 Series standards for "safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition" and AGC/ASA/ASC Joint Guideline #5, "Temporary Job Utility and Services". Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" as prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. During progress of Work, submit copies of reports and permits required by governing authorities, or necessary for installation and efficient operation of temporary services and facilities. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in performance of Work. Maintain or expand as required and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout progress of Work. Do not remove until services or facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. Operate temporary services and facilities in safe and efficient manner. Do not overload temporary services or facilities, and do not permit them to interfere with progress of Work. Should services of independent engineer be required to survey existing or temporary utilities, it shall be at no cost to Owner. Do not allow unsanitary conditions, public nuisances or hazardous conditions to develop or persist at the Site.
H.
I.
J.
K.
015000 - 2
5/23/2011
L.
Do not permit disruption of existing services, freezing of pipes, flooding or contamination of water sources. Maintain temporary facilities in such manner as to prevent discomfort to users. Take necessary fire protection measures. Maintain temporary support facilities in sanitary manner so as to avoid health problems and other deleterious effects. Maintain Site security and protection measures in safe, lawful and publicly acceptable manner. Take necessary measures to prevent site erosion, as applicable. At not time is Site to be without protective fence enclosure(s), as required to protect general public.
M.
N.
1.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative and make connections to existing services to provide temporary services to the Project. Connections to the service shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative for acceptable time for service interruptions, where necessary to make connections for temporary services. Do not interrupt any utility service. Seventy-two (72) hours prior request and approval from the Owners Authorized Representative is required to enable the Owner to shut down any utility required for the work. Contractors employees shall not shut down utilities.
B.
C.
1.5
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide temporary water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction purposes throughout the construction period and until permanent service is in use, including but not limited to following uses: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Construction processes. Fire protection, as appropriate. Drinking water. Cleaning.
Where water use is authorized by Owners Authorized Representative, connect to Owner's metered source, usage will be paid by Owner. Contractor shall exercise water conservation measures, provide hoses with threaded connection and provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. Owners Authorized Representative reserves the right to require the Contract to furnish and install a temporary flow meter during construction and pay for water use, if contractor does not exercise satisfactory water conservation measures.
1.6
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide weather proof, grounded temporary electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity and power characteristics to accommodate performance of Work during construction period. Install service and grounding in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). Include necessary meters, transformers, overload protected disconnect and main distribution switch gear. Provide metal conduit, tubing or armored cable for protection of temporary power wiring where exposed to possible damage during construction operations. Temporary service electrical wiring will be limited to 110-120 volt, 20-amp rating, and wiring of lighting circuits may be non-metallic sheathed cable in areas where located overhead and exposed
B.
C.
D.
015000 - 3
5/23/2011
for surveillance, where permitted by code. Do not wire temporary lighting with plain, exposed (insulated) electrical conductors. Provide metal enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. E. For power hand tools and task lighting, provide temporary 4-gang outlets at each floor level, spaced so that 100-foot extension cord can reach each area of Work. Provide separate 110 120 volt, 20 amp circuit for each 4-gang outlet (4 outlets per circuit).
1.7
TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Wherever overhead floor or roof deck has been completed, install temporary lighting adequate to provide sufficient illumination for safe Work and traffic conditions in every area of Work. Take precautions to limit glare or direct illumination into areas occupied after dark. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq. ft. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq. ft. lighting to staging and storage areas during periods of nonconstruction after dark for security purposes. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq. ft. lighting to interior work areas during periods of nonconstruction after dark for security purposes. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. 1.8
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE, FAX AND E-MAIL A. The Owner will provide connection line(s) for temporary telephone, facsimile (FAX) machine and electronic mail service to the job site field office location. Telephone service will be local access limited. Coordinate location and setup with the Owners Authorized Representative. The Contractor shall provide temporary on site telephone equipment, facsimile (Fax) machine and electronic mail access system on dedicated lines at field office. See Section 013100, Project Administration for off site emergency contact requirements. Maintain temporary telephone, facsimile and e-mail service from start of Work through Final Completion.
B.
C.
1.9
TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
1.10
TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. See Section 017500, Indoor Air Quality for addition temporary ventilation requirements.
1.11
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor and subcontractors may use Owner designated restroom facilities located on the premises. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the designated restroom facilities in a clean and sanitary condition or the privilege may be revoked. Coordinate restroom use with the Owners Authorized Representative. 015000 - 4
5/23/2011
B.
Do not discharge liquid wastes into sewers or drainage facilities, containing excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways. The contractor shall bear the cost of any damages to the sewer system, caused directly or indirectly by his crews or subcontractors.
1.12
WASTE DISPOSAL SERVICE A. If existing sewers or drainage facilities cannot be lawfully used for discharge of liquid waste, provide containers to remove and dispose of waste off Site in a lawful manner. See Section 017419, Waste Management Provide solid waste disposal and recycling facilities for the removal of construction related materials, trash and debris, in accordance with Section 017419. No on-site area is available for a `roll-off dumpster location. Coordinate with the City of Portland and the Owners Authorized Representative the `hooding of parking meters and the use of public right-of-way for rubbish disposal as required. Do not dispose of hazardous materials in a manner that could allow the materials to enter landfills, waterways or other unapproved facilities. The Contractor shall comply with the hazardous material provisions of OUS General Conditions for Public Improvements Section F, and Division 1 Section 017419.
B.
C.
1.13
CONSTRUCTION AIDS & GENERAL SERVICE FACILITIES A. Construction Aids: 1. Design, construct and maintain construction aids and miscellaneous general services facilities as needed to accommodate performance of Work. Construction aids and miscellaneous general services and facilities include, but are not limited to the following: a. b. c. 2. Temporary stairs and ladders. Guardrails and barriers. Walkways.
Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate for proper, safe or efficient performance of Work. Install and maintain temporary walkways around work and to field offices, toilets and other similar areas. Construct walkways of gravel or duckboard units. Provide lifting devices necessary for the proper and efficient movement of materials; provide operating personnel for equipment as required. Provide for use of all hoisting equipment on the project during off hours as required to prevent impeding the project schedule.
3. 4.
B.
Pollution Control: 1. Provide general protection facilities, operate temporary facilities, conduct construction activities, and enforce strict discipline for personnel on Site by methods which comply with environmental regulations, and that minimize possibility that air, water and subsoil may be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects may occur from performance of Work.
C.
Noise Control: 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate and effective mufflers, sound barriers and controls for all construction equipment so that noise from this equipment can be 015000 - 5
5/23/2011
2.
controlled to satisfaction of Owner. Coordinate with Owners Authorized Representative when construction work requires use of air hammers or other objectionable noisy equipment. Comply with all laws and regulations applicable the noise pollution abatement and workplace noise. Rotohammering, grinding, drilling or other excessively noisy operations shall be coordinated with Owner's Authorized Representative and scheduled to avoid impacting building occupants. Jack hammering shall not be allowed at existing building interiors.
D.
Dust Control: 1. All streets, roads or detours used for hauling materials shall be oil dust treated as required to prevent dust, or continually watered to prevent dust. Dust prevention measures, both indoors and outdoors shall be continuous until Final Acceptance by Owner. Provide interior dust control measures, such as temporary partitions, taping of air spaces at doors, maintenance of filters and protection of ducts, etc., as required to control dust. Coordinate to prevent accidental activation of particulate-sensing fire detection system as described under requirements for Hot Work Permit.
2.
E.
Erosion and Sediment Control: 1. Follow city approved master erosion control plan, when applicable. Maintain copy on site.
1.14
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Security: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all protections required during performance of the work, and shall be responsible for any and all damages as specified in OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section G1.1. 2. The Owner will not be responsible for protection of materials or equipment from vandalism or theft. Security is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft. Maintain a security program continuously throughout Project, until Owner occupancy or Owner acceptance precludes, need for security program. Barriers: 1. Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for erection of substantially adequate barriers where needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform construction personnel and public of hazard of concern. Provide lighting and flashing signals as required. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
C.
D.
2.
3. 4. E. Fencing: 1.
Where fencing is required, install general enclosure fence with suitable lock for gates. Locate where indicated on Drawings or as required to substantially complete enclosure around Site or staging/construction operations. Install in 015000 - 6
5/23/2011
2.
manner that will prevent unauthorized persons from easily entering Site. Except when otherwise directed, provide open-mesh, chain-link fencing with posts substantially set in ground, or in moveable concrete blocks. Within five days of Commencement of Work, Contractor shall provide fencing plan for approval by Owner. Plan shall indicate existing fencing to remain, new fencing required and type, location and sequencing of temporary barriers or fencing required for fencing outside primary Site.
F.
Protection of Installed Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual j Specification Sections. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
1.15
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Identification Signage: 1. 2. Project Identification Signage will be furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor. Coordinate signage placement with the Owners Authorized Representative. Project Identification Signage shall be installed by the Contractor within five (5) days of delivery by the Owner and shall be removed by the Contractor following notice of Substantial Completion and prior to Final Completion. Upon removal Project Identification Signage shall become the property of the contractor. Project Identification Sign will consist of two signs, 4'x8' =32 sq ft area, 3/4" marine plywood mounted. Contractor to provide 4x4 post or other materials and means to mount sign with bottom of sign 4 feet above ground.
3.
B.
Project Informational Signs: 1. Contractor shall provide temporary directional signs to direct traffic into and within site. Relocate as Work progress requires.
1.16
FIELD OFFICE A. Provide field office area, and storage and staging locations within the defined scope of work area and in a location approved by the Owners Authorized Representative. Provide temporary lighting, heated and ventilation as specified herein. Provide plan table, notice boards and other furnishings as require for Contractors daily operations and as required by the Owners Authorized Representative. Provide on-site office equipment as specified herein. Relocate field office area, and storage and staging location as required to not impede work. At completion of Work, remove buildings, utility service and debris. Restore area to prior condition.
B.
C. D.
1.17
TRAFFIC REGULATION AND PARKING A. Traffic Control:
015000 - 7
5/23/2011
1.
Comply with all rules and regulations of Owner, City, State and county authorities regarding closing of public streets to use by public traffic, including pedestrians. No road shall be closed to public except by expressed by permission by Owner and City. Control obstructions and hazards with approved signs, barricades and lights where necessary to protect safety of public. Convenience of general public adjacent to Project, protection of persons and property, and access of emergency vehicles are of prime importance and shall be provided for in satisfactory manner.
B.
Flagging Services: 1. Contractor shall provide trained flaggers and barricade hazardous operations during construction activities requiring the use of street areas, as directed by the Owners Authorized representative. Equip flaggers and guards on duty with approved red work apparel and stop/slow paddle kept clean and in good condition. Utilize traffic control cones, drums, flares and lights which are approved by the city of Portland Bureau of Transportation. Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and guide traffic.
2.
C.
Temporary Use of Roads: 1. 2. 3. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. Provide and maintain unobstructed access to fire hydrants. Maintain emergency vehicle top access to the premises.
D.
Construction Related Parking Control: 1. 2. Contractor, sub-contractor and employee parking will not be provided on the premises. The purchase of hoods for parking meters from the city of Portland is suggested. Coordinate all construction deliveries with the Owners Authorized Representative. Purchase and obtain a temporary parking permit from the Portland State University office of Transportation and Parking twenty-four (24) hours prior to anticipated delivery parking need. Temporary construction related parking shall be limited to an assigned staging area as approved in writing by the Owners Authorized Representative. designated for Contractor's use. The Contractor shall be responsible for all contractor and sub-contractor parking citations by the City of Portland and the Portland State University office of Transportation and Parking. All citations must be paid prior to submission of Notice of Final Completion and Request for Final Payment.
3.
1.18
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Until fire protection needs may be fulfilled by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to adequately protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide equipment of adequate capacity to extinguish minor fires in combustible material on the Premises during the construction period. Comply with applicable recommendations of NFPA Standard 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers". Maintain equipment in working condition with current inspection certificate attached to each. Locate fire extinguishers where they are most convenient, visible and effective for their intended purpose, but provide no less than one extinguisher on each floor or in each general Work area, at or near each usable stairwell. Store combustible materials in containers in recognized fire-safe areas.
5.
015000 - 8
5/23/2011
B.
Develop and supervise overall fire prevention and first-aid fire protection program for personnel at Project Site. 1. 2. Review needs with local fire department officials and establish procedures to be followed. Smoking is prohibited on the premises. Contractors personnel are to abide by all rules and regulations regarding smoking and all other fire prevention regulations in force where the Work is to be performed. Smoking is not permitted in structures on the PSU campus. Post warning and information and enforce strict discipline. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of Ignition for fire. Contractor shall ensure that contractor's employees are familiar with Owner's fire procedures and location of fire hydrants and extinguishers in adjacent parts of building adjacent to the construction area.
3. 4. 5. 6.
1.19
PROGRESS CLEANING A. Dirt and debris of all nature caused by execution of Work shall be removed from the Site at end of each work day. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all scraps and materials that are relative to this Project. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space. Hose all paved areas staged with construction material and generally prepare area of Work for occupancy with no further clean-up required by Owner. Clean all spilled dirt, gravel or other foreign material caused by construction operations from all streets and roads at conclusion of each day's operations. Cleaning of large areas shall be by grader and front-end loader supplemented by washing with water power brushing and hand labor. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from Site daily and dispose off-site.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. 1.20
REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade of buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of two (2) feet. Grade site as indicated. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
B. C. D.
END OF SECTION
015000 - 9
5/23/2011
SECTION 015500 - CONTRACTOR PARKING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All parking costs and expenses incurred by any contractor in the course of doing business on Owners property are the sole responsibility of such contractor. There is no free parking on the Owners property. Parking rates for the City of Portland are posted at the parking entrances or on parking meters. Vehicles without permits may be towed away at the expense of the vehicles owner. Parking is not allowed on any Owners roadway unless so indicated. The Contractors authorized representative can obtain parking permits for its employees from the Portland State University Transportation & Parking Services Office, Neuberger Hall (503.725.3442) at prevailing rates. All costs for parking permits, parking in University parking lots and ramps, and any fines incurred by any contractor shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Contractor shall not park in any area not designated for vehicle parking. It will be the responsibility of such contractor to repair and/or reimburse Owner for any damage to Owners property caused by contractors vehicle. Vehicles to be parked on the Owners property shall be governed by Owners Transportation & Parking Services Office.
B.
C.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Additional requirements related to Quality Requirements may be provided as follows: 1. 2. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of the specifications.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACTOR PARKING
015500 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL SECTION 015600 - TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
5/23/2011
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this section includes preservation and protection of existing trees, shrubs, and lawn to remain.
1.2
GENERAL WORK CONSTRAINTS A. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the documents all existing trees, shrubs, and lawn shall remain and be protected. No work shall occur within the area inside the protective fencing.
1.3
COMPENSATION FOR DAMAGE TO EXISTING TREES A. B. The Contractor is responsible for compensating the Owner for any and all damage to trees, shrubs, and lawn. Compensation action and amounts shall be as directed and calculated by a certified Arborist selected by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TREE PROTECTION AND WORK LIMIT FENCING A. Protective Fencing: 6 foot tall temporary chain link fencing with temporary concrete post bases.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Provide protective fencing at the limits for construction as indicated on the landscape drawings and as approved in the Field by the Owner. Prior to beginning construction, tour the site with the Owner and outline the location where protective fencing shall be installed. Fencing shall be installed plumb in locations identified in the field by the Owner. Fencing used to define the edge of construction, where it coincides with the location approved by the Owner for plant protection fence, is acceptable for protection fencing.
3.2
MAINTENANCE A. Maintain all protective fencing plumb, tight, at full height, and where located in the field by District. Replace damaged fencing with new materials as needed.
3.3
REMOVAL A. Remove protective fencing just prior to the site review for Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015600 - 1
5/23/2011
SECTION 015700 - CONTRACTOR STAGING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
BUILDING ENTRY/ROUTES A. Contractor shall schedule all necessary material stocking, demolition and trash removal through building corridors and elevators during non-peak hours or as approved by the PSU (or Owner) Project Manager. All materials will be brought into the building through the loading dock or approved entry and transported using the Owners assigned elevator. The loading dock or entry is only to be used for loading and unloading. The loading dock or entry will not be used for parking. Vehicles left unattended will be towed at the expense of the Contractor.
B.
1.2
PARKING A. Unless stated in a Contract, all parking will be at the expense of the Contractor. All vehicles parked on Owners property must have a parking permit. The Contractor must arrange and secure for all temporary parking permits. Due to limited space, only work vehicles will be allowed at the worksite, and these may enclosed within the Contractors assigned fenced work area. Contractor shall make every effort to carpool to the worksite when possible. It is the Contractors responsibility to secure all parking permits or pay the appropriate meter.
1.3
STAGING/LAY DOWN AREA A. During each phase of Construction, areas required for staging must be submitted to the Owner at least three (3) weeks in advance of the requirement. The date when the area will be reusable by Owner must be included. During construction, the Contractor shall provide all security for its materials, offices, staging and construction parking areas, etc. Owner shall have no responsibility for any of these items. Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining a safe construction area on Owners property and offsite as well, including, without limitation, keeping all public and private roadways and parking areas clean, safe and functioning. The Contractor shall only be obligated clean up of those portions of public or private roadways and parking which have been affected by Contractor's activities. 1. Use of lay down area is for the staging and storing of construction related equipment or material for Contractor construction activities only as related to PSU projects. Contractor is responsible for making sure the lay down area complies with all local building and fire codes and regulations and all Owners safety codes and requirements. Contractor is responsible for keeping the grounds surrounding the lay down area safe and clean of construction materials, litter, trash, and scrap materials. Continuous housekeeping is required including daily removal of combustible waste and storage of combustible waste in approved metal containers and trash bins with metal lids. Outdoor tool and equipment power cords shall be removed
B.
2.
3.
CONTRACTOR STAGING
015700 - 1
5/23/2011
nightly. Clean-up and sweeping to be done on a daily basis at the completion of a work shift. 4. Contractor is responsible for their own trash management, including removal of trash from campus. Contractor shall comply with recycling guidelines specified in the Contract Documents. Work & safety rules specified in the Contract Documents apply to lay down areas. Construction Personal Protective Equipment is required in the lay down area. Owner will not be held liable for any loss or damage to any contractor structures or equipment in the lay down area. There is NO SMOKING in the lay down area or inside structures or shipping containers in the lay down area. No smoking signs shall be posted at these locations. Contractor is responsible for keeping all fire and emergency access lanes surrounding the lay down area open at all times. Fire lane parking is subject to immediate tow at Contractors expense. Fire hydrants must be accessible at all times. Contractors portable toilets must be located inside the designated lay down area and maintained to PSUs satisfaction at all times. Contractors will not be permitted to store any type of construction material on top of their shipping containers or structures for safety reasons. No combustible materials will be permitted to be stored under a storage trailer. Contractor shall return the lay down area in the same or better condition than when initially used. Payment and/or fees may be withheld until repairs by the Contractor have been completed to PSUs satisfaction. If outside staging of material is required in unpaved areas, Owner is not responsible for mud, dirt, snow, rain, ice and/or rust on materials. Materials stored in staging area(s) must be protected from the elements and from damage or degradation as required in contract documents. Typical temporary construction fencing shall be covered with opaque material to prevent seeing inside the fencing. Construction fencing shall be placed on the interior side of the opaque material. The lay down area shall be made as small as possible and configured to minimize impact to the daily operations of the campus. Contractor to use lay down area for minimal amount of material inventory as required to provide an efficient construction process.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACTOR STAGING
015700 - 2
5/23/2011
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION A. The requirements specified in this section relate to general product requirements substitutions by the Contractor, Sub-contractors and Suppliers performing Work under these Contract Documents and includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Contractors Responsibilities Product Options Substitution Requests during the Bidding Process Substitution Requests after the Award of Contract Substitutions not permitted Product Delivery, Storage & Handling Product Installation
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional Product Option and Substitution Request Information may be provided as follows: 1. 2. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Products are materials, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and other systems incorporated into the Project, regardless of whether they were purchased for the Project or taken from the Contractors previously purchased inventory. It does not include machinery and equipment used in preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Materials are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed or installed to form units of Work. Substitutions includes proposed changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.
B.
C.
1.4
REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Requests for substitution of products in place of those specified shall be in accordance with the Public Improvement Agreement, OUS General Conditions, with Supplemental Conditions, and as specified herein. The Contractor assumes responsibility for the requirements as set forth herein. Any cost or time impact shall be at the Contractors expense.
1.5
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES A. In requesting substitution, the Contractor shall be comply with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts, This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. 2. Investigate proposed products and determine that they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
5/23/2011
3.
4.
Coordinate installation of accepted substitutions into the Work, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects and within original time constraints. Waive all claims for additional costs related to substitutions, which consequently become apparent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Contractors Options in selecting products is limited by the requirements of the Contract Documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. Where products or manufactures are specified by name or manufacturer, they shall be assumed accompanied by the term, or approved equal. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Substitutions and submittals to obtain review from Architect and Owners Authorized Representative for use of substitute products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS DURING THE BIDDING PROCESS A. Substitution requests shall meet the following criteria for review by the Architect and Owners Authorized: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Submit five (5) copies of each request for substitution using the submittal process specified in Division 1, Section 013300, Item 3.1. Substitutions shall be requested using the Substitution Request Form provided herein. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. Complete data on each material and system for this project only, substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with the Contract Documents. Complete evidence including test numbers and supporting reports indicating compliance with referenced standards. A statement from the Manufacturer(s) of the proposed substitution materials stating that any and all warranties required by the contract documents for the originally specified materials can and will be provided for the substitution materials, and that required warranties shall be issued upon successful completion of the Work.
B.
Substitutions shall be requested prior to the Deadline for Request for Change and Protests, and accepted by Addendum prior to the date and time bid materials are due at the PSU Office of Facilities.
3.2
SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after date of Contract, except when required due to unforeseen circumstances. Within a period of thirty (30) days after date of Contract, the Owner may, at its option, consider formal written requests for substitution of products in place of those specified, when submitted in accordance with the requirements stipulated herein. Substitution requests shall meet the following criteria for review by the Architect and Owners Authorized: 1. 2. Submit five (5) copies of each request for substitution using the submittal process specified in Division 1, Section 013300, Item 3.1. Substitutions shall be requested using the Substitution Request Form provided herein.
016000 - 2
5/23/2011
B.
To receive consideration, one or more of the following conditions must be documented in any such request: 1. 2. 3. 4. The substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. The substitution is required due to unavailability of a specified product, through no fault of the Contractor. The substitution is required because subsequent information disclosed the inability of the specified product to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. The substitution is required because it has become clearly evident, in the judgment of the Owner, that a substitute would be substantially in the best interest of the Owner in terms of cost, time, or other considerations.
B.
For products specified only by referenced standards, provide products by any Manufacturer meeting standards specified. For products specified by naming one or more products, provide any product named. If certain conditional requirements are stipulated, each product must comply with these requirements. Requests for approval of substitutions are subject to meeting requirements stipulated above. For products specified by naming a product to match existing products or systems, provide product of the same name. There is no option and no substitution is allowed. For each substitution that is accepted, the Contractor shall coordinate the work of all other trades and modify surrounding conditions as required to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owners Authorized Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED A. B. Submitted without first requesting approval thereof in accordance with requirements of this Section. Acceptance will require substantial revision of the Contract Documents, except as allowed by Paragraph 3.2 above.
3.4
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. 2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and- other losses. Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss. Control delivery schedules to ensure timely delivery for incorporation into the Work, while minimizing long-term storage at the site and preventing overcrowding of the construction area. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged.
3.
4.
5.
016000 - 3
5/23/2011
6.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
3.5
PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
END OF SECTION
016000 - 4
5/23/2011
SECTION 017300 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work of this Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional information regarding cutting and patching requirements may be found in the follows: 1. 2. 3. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching in conformance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvements Section F.3 and as specified herein. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. The Owners Authorized Representative shall pre-approve all field modifications. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architects opinion, reduce the buildings aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. The contractor shall remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the owner.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 017300 - 1
CUTTING AND PATCHING
5/23/2011
3.2
PREPARATION: A. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
C. D.
3.3
PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Cutting: 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter.
B.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Patching: 1. 2. 3. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
4.
5. 6.
017300 - 2
5/23/2011
D.
Cleaning: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION
017300 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT GOALS A. The Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of waste and trash possible.
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional waste management requirements may be found in the following: 1. 2. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. Non-hazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitiblity, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid wasted and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water.
B.
C.
D.
E. F.
G.
H.
I. J. K.
L.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017419 - 1
5/23/2011
M.
Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
N. O. P.
1.4
WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the relevant requirements, provide the necessary documentation and instruct all sub-contractors and suppliers regarding energy efficiency, air quality, demolition, recycling, waste management and final cleaning. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Burning on the project site. Burying on the project site. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. Other illegal dumping or burying.
B.
C.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, Sate and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1. The city of Portland requires all building projects with a permit value of $50,000 or more to separate and recycle certain materials from the job site. The contractor shall be responsible for assuring recycling at the job site and for completing the pre-construction recycling plan form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues. See Division 1 Section 013300 for submittal procedures. Submit Waste Disposal Reports with each application for progress payment, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. Failure to submit Report will delay payment. Prepare Waste Disposal Reports as follows: A. B. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: 1. Identification of material.
2.2
017419 - 2
5/23/2011
2. 3. 4. C.
Amount, in tons or cubic yards, or trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. Identification of material. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. Included manifest, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
D.
Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.
E.
Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: 1. 2. 3. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
F.
Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Architect, and Owners Authorized Representative. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. 2. 3. Pre-bid meeting Pre-construction meeting Regular job-site meetings.
B.
C.
D.
017419 - 3
5/23/2011
E.
Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. 2. 3. Provide containers as required. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to contractors. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
F.
Hazardous Materials: If, during the course of the Work, the Contractor observes or suspects the existence of Hazardous Materials in the structure or components within the defined scope of work area, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the immediate area and notify the Owners Authorized Representative, who will, under separate contract, facilitate the remove of the hazardous material. The Contractor will be required to schedule ten (10) days of slack or "down" time for the removal of potential unforeseen materials. Any delay caused by asbestos abatement that lasts less than ten (10) days shall not constitute a delay as defined in Section D.2 of the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts and shall not result in any additional compensation to the contractor. If removal of the material takes more than ten (10) days, the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the completion date for the Work equal to the number of days required for removal, plus reimbursement for Contractor's cost of the Work for only those days in excess of ten (10).
G.
Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
H. I.
END OF SECTION
017419 - 4
5/23/2011
SECTION 017500 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT GOALS A. The owner and building tenants will occupy adjacent areas of the premises during the entire period of construction. The Contractor shall maintain indoor air quality of occupied spaces throughout the construction period to permit normal operations and upon substantial completion provide premises and building systems that meet minimal indoor air quality standards as described herein. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent dust and other particulates from entering HVAC ducts and equipment, and from migrating into occupied spaces. 1. 2. 3. Cleaning of existing ductwork to remain is not contemplated under this contract. Verify the condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to starting work. The Contractor shall bear the cost of duct and equipment cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative and provide adequate barriers, taping, ventilation and filters to prevent dust, fumes, odors, vapors or other agents from impacting normal operations in adjacent occupied spaces. Failure to do so may result in suspension of Work at the Contractors expense. Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants: a. b. Furnish Products meeting or exceeding the specifications. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution.
B.
4.
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional information related to Indoor Air Quality management requirements, temporary facilities required and Owners remedies for non-compliance may be found in the following: 1. 2. OUS General Conditions Other Sections of these specifications.
1.3
REFERENCES A. B. C. ASHRE 62 Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 1999 and Addenda. ASHRAE Std. 129 Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness; 1997. Oregon Administrative Rules Sections; 437-0020081, 437-002-0107, 437-002-0382. Oregon Administrative Rules Section 437-003-0027.
D.
1.4
DEFINITIONS A. Absorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
017500 - 1
5/23/2011
B.
Contaminates: Gases, vapors, smoke, airborne mold and mildew, and other regulated pollutants including but not limited to construction related noise. Particulates: Dust, dirt and other airborne solid matter. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, adhesives and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during the installation, drying, or curing processes.
C. D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by absorptive materials by: 1. 2. 3. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. Delivering and storing such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying of wet work without impacting delivery schedules.
B.
Begin temporary construction heating and ventilation as soon as the work limits are substantially enclosed. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be performed, coordinate the temporary shut down of HVAC systems with the Owners Authorized Representative. The Owners Authorized Representative may require work by the Contractor outside of normal business hours (8:00 AM through 5:00 PM) if HVAC systems serving occupied areas are required to be shut down for extended periods. When working in a portion of an occupied building, provide barriers necessary to prevent movement of air from the construction area to occupied areas. HVAC equipment and ductwork SHALL NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. 2. Provide minimum temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour. Increase as required for wet work. Exhaust directly to outside. The Owners Authorized Representative shall approve the Contractors exhaust venting plan including; equipment, routing and outlet prior to installation. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installations.
C.
D.
E.
3. F.
Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms or exit ways. Coordinate all materials storage with the Owners Authorized Representative. Prior to use of return air ductworks without intake filters, remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grills, and terminal units for dust.
G.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
017500 - 2
5/23/2011
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H. I.
Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduits. Clean tops of doors and frames. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms where work is performed, including the tops of pipes, ducts, conduits, equipment and supports. Clean return plenums of air handling units. Remove intake filters last, after all cleaning operations are complete.
Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction to avoid unnecessary contaminants due to the construction process. Perform Air Contaminant Testing as specified herein.
J. 3.2
AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING: A. Perform air contaminate testing before starting construction, as a baseline for evaluating postoccupancy test results, as specified herein. Perform air contaminate testing prior to submitting for substantial completion. Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. 2. 3. D. All other construction operations are substantially complete. HVAC systems have been tested adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. New HVAC unit air filters have been installed.
B. C.
Collect the following indoor air samples from representative spaces of the work areas: 1. 2. 3. 4. Collect samples while windows and exterior doors are closed, HVAC system is in normal operation and the building premises are unoccupied. Collect samples in each space served by the new air handling system. Collect air samples between a height of 48 inches and 72 inches above finished floor. Collect samples from same locations on three separate days and average the results of the three samples.
E.
Submit a report analyze the air samples and compare them against the pre-construction baseline (See Section 01305 for submittal procedure). Air Contamination Concentrations and Limits shall be as set forth in the Oregon Administrative Rules and as follows (the most restrictive shall apply): 1. 2. 3. 4. Carbon Monoxide: Measure in ppm, in relation to outside air, at air intake; not more then outside air. Airborne Mold and Mildew: Measure in relation to outside air, at air intake, but in no case less then 48 inches above finish grade; not more then outside air. Formaldehyde: Measure in micrograms per cubic meter in relation to outside air, at air intake; Not more then 20 micrograms per cubic meter higher then outside air. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in relation to outside air, at air intake; Not more than 200 micrograms per cubic meter higher than outside air. Total Particulate Matter: Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in relation to air, at air intake, not more then 20 micrograms per cubic meter higher then outside air.
F.
5.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
017500 - 3
5/23/2011
3.3
VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING: A. B. Perform ventilation effectiveness testing prior to substantial completion. Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until: 1. 2. 3. C. D. HVAC systems have been tested adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. Air contamination testing has been completed satisfactorily. New HVAC unit air filter have been installed.
Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE 129. If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate balancing of the system, adjust and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
END 0F SECTION
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
017500 - 4
5/23/2011
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. The requirements specified in this Section relate to all Contractors individually performing Work under these Contract Documents and include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Final Cleaning System Start-up, Testing & Adjusting Operations & Maintenance Manuals Warranties & Bonds Training Spare Parts & Extra Quantities Project Record Documents Final Review and Payment
Project closeout is a term used to describe certain collective project requirements, indicating Work under this Contract that is fulfilled near the end of the Contract time in preparation for Final Completion, as well as Final Payment to the Contractor. Special requirements for individual units of work may be included in appropriate Specification Sections of this Project Manual.
C.
1.2
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Additional Contract closeout requirements may be provided as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. OUS General Conditions Supplementary General Conditions Section 013300, Submittals Other Sections of these Specifications
PART 2 - PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION: A. Substantial Completion shall be defined per OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts Section A.1, and Notification of Substantial Completion by the Contractor to the Owner shall be through the Architect as specified in Section K.4 of the same and as supplemented by OUS Supplemental General Condition SG-6. See Division 1, Section 013300 for general Submittal Review Procedure. Submit Certificate of Substantial Completion with accompanying `punchlist and date for punchlist completion to the Architect once the Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected and all prerequisites to substantial competition have been addressed. Prior to signing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Architect will perform one Substantial Completion review of the Work. The Contractor shall pay the cost of additional Substantial Completion reviews of the Work.
B.
C.
2.2
FINAL CLEANING
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
5/23/2011
A.
Perform final cleaning of all items of Work prior to Substantial Completion review of the Work. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of work to condition expected from normal commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with all manufacturers recommendations. Complete the following prior to requesting Architects review of the Work for Substantial Completion certification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces. Vacuum all carpeted, fabric and other soft surfaces. Clean all Contractor and Owner provided equipment and fixtures. Clean or replace all filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems impacted by the Work. Clean the Project Site and adjacent areas impacted by the Work, including landscaped and parking areas, or rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to broom clean condition. Remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to smooth, even-textured surface. Re-clean areas and equipment prior to inspection for Final Completion, if dirtied in completion of punchlist work.
7.
B.
Unless otherwise directed by the Architect or Owners Authorized Representative, remove temporary protective devices and facilities, which were installed during the course of the Work to protect previously completed work from the remainder of the construction to be completed, or to protect the public. Comply with all safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning and dispose of waste materials in accordance with Division 1, Section 017419 and the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts.
C.
2.3
SYSTEM START-UP, TESTING & ADJUSTING
A.
The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling for the start-up and testing of various equipment and systems provided by the Contractor and Owner with the Owners authorized representative. Notify the Owners Authorized Representative and the Architect a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the start-up or testing of each item. The Contractor shall submit to the Owners Authorized Representative for review and approval, a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the start-up or testing, five (5) copies of the following: 1. 2. 3. A paragraph-by-paragraph program of the Contractors proposed testing procedure, developed to demonstrate compliance with the contract documents. Check off sheets for the review of each item of equipment and system. Each program and check off sheet shall provide the following information: 1) Project information required by Division 1, Section 013300, Item 1.5. 2) Product information required by Division 1, Section 013300, Item 3.6. 3) Other information as required the fully describe the item. 4) Provide spaces for testing Review sign off by Owners Authorized Representatives and the Architects Authorized Representative
B.
C.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
5/23/2011
D.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper connection of services, lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequencing or other conditions that could cause damage. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturers. Verify that wiring, piping and support components for equipment are complete and tested. Execute start-up under the supervision of the Owners Authorized Representative(s), the responsible manufacturers representative, Contractors personnel in accordance with the manufactures recommendations. Submit five (5) copies of all Installation, Adjustment and Balancing and Testing Reports for each piece of equipment and system in accordance with the Submittal Review Procedures, specified in Division 1, Section 013300, Item 3.1. Operating equipment and systems shall be tested in the presence of the Owners Authorized Representatives and the Architects Authorized Representative to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturers recommendations: 1. 2. Testing shall be conducted under operating conditions as specified by the Owners Authorized Representatives and the Architects Authorized Representative. Copies of all test reports shall be included in the Project Record Documents.
E.
F. G.
H.
I.
J.
All elements of systems shall be tested to demonstrate that total systems satisfy all requirements of the Contract Documents. Test each piece of equipment for proper operation, followed by each subsystem, followed by entire system, followed by interfaces with other major systems. The Contractor shall provide all materials and equipment required for equipment and system testing. The Contractor shall perform the following minimal tests and additional tests as required by the Owners Authorized Representative: 1. 2. 3. System shall be checked for proper installation, and shall be adjusted and calibrated to verify that it is ready to function as specified. All system elements shall be checked to verify that they have been properly installed and that all connections have been made correctly. All discrete elements and sub-systems shall be adjusted and balanced and shall be checked for proper operation.
K. L.
2.4
OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall Operations and Maintenance Manuals for review and project record documentation in accordance with OUS General Conditions for public Improvement Contract Section K.2, in accordance with the Submittal Review Procedures, specified in Division 1, Section 013300, Item 3.1. Include Operation and Maintenance instructions complete with technical information, required warranties & bonds and name, address and phone number of the Contractor(s) and Manufacturer(s) of each material and product. Bind in separate three-ring binders. Label similar to Project Documents binder with dividers by Specification section and supplier.
B.
2.5
WARRANTIES & BONDS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
5/23/2011
A. B.
Provide all warranties and bonds specified in other Sections of this project manual. Include all required warranties and bonds in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Item 2.04 herein. List Subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer, with address and telephone number of responsible principles. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain all information, and are notarized as applicable. Co-execute documents as required.
C.
D. E. 2.6
TRAINING A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owners Authorized Representative training sessions for all equipment and systems in accordance with OUS General Conditions for public Improvement Contract Section K.5.
2.7
SPARE PARTS & EXTRA QUANTITIES A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts and extra quantities in accordance with OUS General Conditions for public Improvement Contract Section K.6. The Contractor shall submit in accordance with Division 1 Section 013300 Item 3.1, five (5) copies of the following: 1. 2. Check off sheets for the review of each item of material or product for which extra quantities are required. Each check off sheet shall provide the following information: a. b. c. d. Project information required by Division 1, Section 01300, Item 1.05. Product information required by Division 1, Section 01300, Item 3.06. Amount of extra parts or quantity required. Provide spaces for testing Review sign off by Owners Authorized Representatives and the Architects Authorized Representative.
B.
C.
Coordinate delivery to the Owner with the Owners Authorized Representative and submit receipts of delivery corresponding to spare parts and extra quantities check off sheet.
2.8 A.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit three (3) copies of the Project Record Documents for review in accordance with Division 1 Section 013300 Item 3.1. The Project Record Documents shall be organized to include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Title and date of Project, Owner's Project Number Table of Contents Specifications As-Built Drawings (blueprints or photocopies) Inspection Reports, as applicable Warranty(ies), as applicable Operations and Maintenance Instructions Approved and stamped Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples (Provide 1 set of reproducible copies for Owner's file, in Microsoft Word or AutoCAD 2000 electronic formats, or on 3 MIL thick double sided and toothed Mylar.)
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
5/23/2011
B.
Bind each copy of the Project Record Documents in a black, hard cover, three-ring binder with each Section clearly indexed with tabbed divider pages. The project team list shall include the address and phone number of the Owner, Architect, Contractor, inspectors, subcontractors, and the materials manufacturers. Legibly mark each Specification Section to indicate actual as-built conditions. The as-built Specifications shall clearly indicate changes in the Work made by Addendum(a) and/or Change Order(s), actual materials used, and actual Manufacturer(s) used. Legibly mark the drawings to indicate actual "as-built conditions." The drawings shall clearly indicate changes in the Work made by Addendum(a) and/or Change Order(s). The Owner shall employ the Architect to modify CAD documents into a "recorded as-built" base for Owner's usage, based on information provided by Contractor. Include inspection reports and Architect's field reports, if applicable. Include a copy of required Warranty(ies) clearly marked to identify the Owner's responsibilities under the terms of the Warranty(ies). Make corrections to all Project Record Documents and resubmit as part of Final Completion Review. Contact the Owners Authorized Representative for a sample of acceptable Record Documents if needed.
C.
D.
E.
F. G.
H. I.
PART 3 - PREREQUISITES TO FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT 3.1 The Contractor shall comply with all terms of OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contract Sections E.6 and I.1, unless otherwise amended herein, prior to filing Notice of Final Completion or requesting Final Payment. The Contractor shall return all keys requested for access to buildings and work areas and obtain a deposit refund, as specified in Division 1, Section 013100, Item 3.9. The Contractor shall notify all Subcontractors in writing of incomplete and/or incorrect items and the anticipated filing of Final Completion. Notify far enough in advance of the completion date that the Work can be completed on schedule. Said Work shall be immediately corrected. Submit to the Owners Authorized Representative Lien Releases in accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contract Section K.8. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with an unconditional Certificate of Occupancy from the local building officials, in accordance with OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contract Section K.8. Notify the Architect in writing that all items are complete and ready for Final Completion review and that the Work product is fully usable. Submit three (3) copies of all record documents for Final Completion review at this time. The Architect will review all documents. The Architect will review all Work that has been certified as complete to the best knowledge of the Contractor. The Architect will also list all remaining incomplete punchlist Work and assign a probable value and time to complete such uncompleted Work. The Architect will review the Work for conformance. Time is of an essence on this project. If the Work is found to be in nonconformance, the Architect will notify the Owner of the nonconforming items and probable
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7 3.8
3.9
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
5/23/2011
value and time for completion. Nonconforming items will require retainage of monies to ensure that the Contractor will complete all Work within the time established by the Public Improvement Agreement and as amended by executed Change Orders. 3.10 The Contractor shall make the required corrections to the Work expeditiously. Sufficient retainage monies will be held to pay for uncompleted Work, should the Contractor fail to perform. A letter will be addressed to the Contractor noting the project status and the monies available for a partial-final payment upon receipt of billing. When Contract closeout procedures are completed and all Punchlist deficiencies have been corrected, final acceptance by the Owner will be documented. The Contractor will receive written notice of acceptance of the Work and notification that final payment may be billed and released. Note that final wage rate submittal and documentation of all BOLI fees are required prior to final payment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all parking citations received in relation with the project from the City of Portland and the Portland State University office of Transportation and Parking. All citations must be paid prior to submission of notice of Final Completion and Request for final Payment. All warranties shall commence and become effective in accordance with Section I of the OUS General Conditions for Public Improvement Contracts and as modified by OUS Supplemental General Condition SG6.
3.11
3.12
3.13
PART 5 - EXECUTION NOT USED
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL
5/23/2011
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. B. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B.
C.
1.4 A.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
B.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
5/23/2011
4.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
C.
1.6 A.
FIELD CONDITIONS Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furniture b. Wiring / Cabling back to existing walls
B.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
D.
E. F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A. B.
EXAMINATION Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
024119 - 2
5/23/2011
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
D.
3.2 A.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. e. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
3.
3.3 A.
PREPARATION Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
024119 - 3
5/23/2011
1. 2. 3. 4.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
3.4 A.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
2.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
B.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 A.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site. 1. 2. 3. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
024119 - 4
5/23/2011
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 A.
CLEANING Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
3.7
024119 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SECTION INCLUDES A. Cold-formed metal framing for: 1. Interior steel stud walls. 2. Interior steel ceilings 3. Bridging, bracing, clips and other accessories.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Division 8 Section "Glazing" Division 9 Section " Painting" Division 6 Section Interior Finish Carpentry Division 6 Section Interior Architectural Woodwork
1.4
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. ASTM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. AISI - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.
E. F. G. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. Product Data : Submit manufacturer's product literature and data sheets for specified
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-1
5/23/2011
products. C. Manufacturers certification of product compliance with codes and standards.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall provide effective, full time quality control over all fabrication and erection complying with the pertinent codes and regulations of government agencies having jurisdiction.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installing. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions per the recommendations of ASTM C955.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 1. 2. 3. B. C. 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Dietrich Industries, Inc. USG Industries Approved equal. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000. All products to be manufactured by current members of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
COMPONENTS A. Structural Studs: Cold-Formed galvanized steel C-studs. 1. Flange Length: 1 5/8 inch (41mm) 162 flange. 2. Web Depth: As indicated on drawings. 3. Minimum Material Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33ksi (227 MPa) (for 33mils through 118mils). Structural Track: Cold-Formed galvanized steel runner tracks 1. Flange Length: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) T150 flange. 2. Web: Track Web Size to match stud web size. 3. Minimum Material Thickness: Track Thickness to match wall stud thickness. 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33ksi (227 MPa) (for 33mils through 118mils) Furring Channel: Furring existing wall. 1. Size: As required by design. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; complying with ASTM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections.
B.
C. D.
054000-2
5/23/2011
E. 1. 2. 3. 4. F. 2.3
Structural Joists: Cold-Formed galvanized steel C-channel. Flange Length: 1 5/8 inch (41mm) 162 flange. Web Depth: As indicated on drawings. Minimum Material Thickness: As indicated on drawings. Minimum Yield Strength: 33ksi (227 MPa) (for 33mils through 118mils).
Touch-Up Paint: Complying with ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
MATERIALS A. Steel: Galvanized Steel meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A 1003. 1. Coating: Galvanized G60 coating minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.
2.4 A.
AUXILIARY WALL FRAMING MATERIALS General; Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. 3.2 Inspect supporting substrates and structures for compliance of proper conditions for installation and performance of the cold-formed structural framing.
PREPARATION A. Prepare attachment surfaces so that they are plumb, level, and in proper alignment for accepting the clod-formed structural framing.
3.3
FABRICATION A. B. Cut all framing components square for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Plumb, align and securely attach studs to flanges of both upper and lower runners, except that in the case of interior, non-load bearing walls where studs need not be attached to upper or lower runners. In all doubled jamb studs and doubled headers not accessible to insulation contractors, provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere. Splices in members other than top and bottom runner track are not permitted. Provide temporary bracing where required, until erection is complete. Provide welded components as indicated on the Drawings.
C. D. E. F. 3.4
INSTALLATION A. Securely anchor runners to the supporting structure as shown on the drawings.
054000-3
5/23/2011
B. C. D.
Provide complete, uniform and level bearing support at the bottom runner. Include headers and supporting studs at wall openings as shown on the drawings. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted..
END OF SECTION
054000-4
5/23/2011
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Steel components for site built tables.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
1.5 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.6 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
5/23/2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 A. B.
FERROUS METALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
2.3 A.
FASTENERS Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
B. C. D. E. F.
2.4 A. B. C.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting." Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.5 A.
FABRICATION, GENERAL Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
B.
C.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
5/23/2011
D. E.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
G.
H.
I.
2.6 A.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
B.
2.7 A.
FINISHES, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
B. C.
2.8 A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
5/23/2011
1. B. C.
Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting".
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
B.
C.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
3.2 A.
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.3 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
05/23/2011
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood furring, blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. Related Requirements: 1. 2. 1.3 A. B. C. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" Division 06 Section "Interior Finish Carpentry
1.2
B.
DEFINITIONS Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 3.
05/23/2011
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. B. C. D.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
2.2 A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
05/23/2011
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. C. D. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
2.3 A. 2.4 A.
Lumber Species: Douglas Fir, WCLIB or WWPA. PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, except fire-retardant treated where required by code, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
05/23/2011
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Whether shown on Drawings or not, install wood blocking where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. . END OF SECTION 061000
C. D.
E.
3.2
B.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
5/23/2011
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. B. Interior standing and running trim.
1.2
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior woodwork.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 12 inches long
B.
1.4 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
B.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 1.5 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS
5/23/2011
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
2.2 A.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Species and Grade: White Oak; Clear; NHLA. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color
2.3 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
062023 - 2
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 2.4 A. FABRICATION
5/23/2011
Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. 2. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. Wood board paneling.
B.
Ease edges of lumber to 1/16-inch radius .
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. 3.2 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. B. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
3.3
Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. 2. 3. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight.
4.
062023 - 3
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 5.
5/23/2011
Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.
3.4 A.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. 2. 3. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 A.
ADJUSTING Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the construction period. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
3.6
3.7
062023 - 4
05/23/2011
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Interior frames and jambs. Plastic-laminate cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops. Solid surface countertops (alternate) Shop built computer desks. Wood wall panels Decorative routed wood wall panels Sliding wooden door panels Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
1.2
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section.
2.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes. Product Data: For panel products high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate cabinet hardware and accessories handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes.
1.4
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL C. Shop Drawings: For all cabinetry and panels: 1. 2. 3. D.
05/23/2011
Show details full size. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
Samples for Verification: 1. 2. 3. 4. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. Plastic laminates and solid surfacing, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
E. F. G. 1.5 A.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. Qualification Data: For fabricator. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Installer Qualifications (Cabinetry and Countertops): Fabricator of products. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
B. C.
1.6 A.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
064023 - 2
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 1.7 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS
05/23/2011
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. 2. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
B.
C.
1.8 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. MATERIALS General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White Oak Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. ARMORcore by States Industries (unless otherwise noted) Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 064023 - 3
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 5. D.
05/23/2011
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: As selected by Architect from the following: a. b. c. Formica Corporation. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
F.
Acrylic Solid Surface: HI-MACS 1. Manufacturer: LG Hausys America INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
2.2 A. B. C. 2.3 A. B. C.
Grade: Premium. Wood Species and Cut: White Oak, plain sawn. Transparent finish. PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS Grade: Premium. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. Core Material: Particle Board. 1. 2. 3. Cabinet Frames, Panels, Doors: 3/4 inch thick. Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick. Drawer Sides, Backs, Bottoms: 1/2 inch thick.
D.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. Edges: Oak edge banding 1/8 thick.
E.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Thermoset decorative panels.
064023 - 4
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL F. G. 2.4 A. B. C. D.
05/23/2011
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect. PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS Grade: Premium. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect. Edge Treatment: 1. Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2. Wood Bullnose as indicated on drawings. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue; 1 inch thick. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS (alternate)
E. F.
2.5 A. B. C. D. 2.6 A. B. C. D.
Acrylic Solid Surface: nominal thickness Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect. Edge Treatment: 1 built-up edge, straight with slightly eased edge. Backer Sheet: plywood COMPUTER TABLE COMPONENTS MDF composite wood panels: 5 ply, wood veneer/MDF composite panel, ARMORcore by States Industries, 1 thick. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect. Edge Treatment: 1. Wood Bullnose as indicated on drawings. Finish: 1. Transparent at all surfaces without plastic laminate
064023 - 5
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 2.7 A. B. C. 2.8 A. B. C. 2.9 A. B. C. WOOD VENEER WALL PANELS Veneer faced MDF panels: White Oak veneer, 3/4 thick. Edge Treatment: 1/8 thick edge banding Finish: Transparent SLIDING DOOR PANELS
05/23/2011
Veneer faced MDF panels: White Oak veneer, 3/8 thick, laminate two layers for total thickness. Edge Treatment: solid wood Finish: Transparent CARVED MDF WALL PANELS MDF panels Edge Treatment: chamfer 1/8 Finish: primer, (2) coats acrylic latex.
2.10 A.
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): opening, self-closing last 15 degrees. BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
B. C. D. E.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. 2. 3. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide.
064023 - 6
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL F. G. H. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
05/23/2011
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, brown, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
J. K. L. M.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. Countertop support brackets: 1. Speedbrace, 21 x 28, black, mounted 16 o.c. minimum. Wall Panel Clips: aluminum Z clips, as approved. Sliding Door Hardware: Beyerle Unotec Object Stainless Steel Wood Door Track Set 1. Guide Rail, solid stainless steel, 1 dia, length as required. 2. Wall attachments number as required by track length. 3. Door trolleys, stainless steel (2) each door 4. Door stoppers, stainless steel (2) each door 5. Bottom Guide, stainless steel (2) each door
2.11 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
C. D.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
064023 - 7
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 2.12 A. B. FABRICATION, GENERAL
05/23/2011
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
C.
D.
E.
Carved Panels: Carve decorative panels with CNC routing equipment per Drawings, CAD files provided by the Architect.
2.13 A. B. C.
SHOP FINISHING Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels.
D.
Transparent Finish: 1. 2. 3. 4. Grade: Premium. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. Staining: as selected by Architect Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
064023 - 8
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. PREPARATION
05/23/2011
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. INSTALLATION
3.2 A. B. C. D. E.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
F.
G.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2. H.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 064023 - 9
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 3.3 A. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
05/23/2011
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
B. C.
064023 - 10
5/23/2011
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. B. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2
Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fireresistance-rated construction and in smoke barriers.
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
C. D. E.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE
5/23/2011
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. b. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
B.
1.5 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. COORDINATION A. B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.
B.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc.
078413 - 2
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 A. Johns Manville. 3M Fire Protection Products. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. USG Corporation.
5/23/2011
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. E. F. G. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
B.
C.
D.
W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. b. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
078413 - 3
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 A. Fire-rated form board. Fillers for sealants.
5/23/2011
Temporary forming materials. Substrate primers. Collars. Steel sleeves.
FILL MATERIALS Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
B. C. D. E.
F. G.
2.4
078413 - 4
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION
5/23/2011
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
B. 3.2 A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. 2. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3. B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. INSTALLATION
C.
3.3 A. B.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
C.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
078413 - 5
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL 2. 3.
5/23/2011
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 A. B. C.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
3.5
B.
078413 - 6
5/23/2011
SECTION 088000 GLAZING / GLAZING HARDWARE / GLAZING FILMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. Through Glass Point Supported Tempered Glass Assemblies. Pivoting Glass Door Assembly Glazing for site glazed openings Architectural Decorative Films
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass B. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual; national Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers C. AAMA CW-12-84 Structural Properties of Glass D. ASTM E 2358-04 Standard specification for the Performance of Glass in Permanent Glass Railing Systems, Guards and Balustrades.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements for Guard Assembly: 1. Support distributed load of 50 pounds per linear foot (0.73kN/M), applied horizontally at right angles in any direction. 2. Support concentrated horizontal load of 200 pounds (0.89kN), applied in any direction. 3. 50 lbs (0.22kN) on 1 sf (0.093m2) perpendicular at any location 4. Maximum deflection at top of glass is height/24.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturers technical product data for components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned drawings of assemblies indicating the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Elevations; include joint locations, transitions, and terminations. Glass light fabrication plans with dimensions, holes and finishes. Point support layout, details and attachment to support structure. Manufacturers installation and maintenance instructions.
GLAZING / GLAZING HARDWARE / GLAZING FILM
088000 - 1
5/23/2011
D. Engineering Design Report: Calculations showing point support reactions and glass stresses. E. Samples of manufacturers finishes
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components and installation are to be in accordance with state and local building codes. B. All components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer. C. All glass to be fabricated by an approved tempered to a tolerance of 1/32 for the light size and hole locations.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials properly protected against damage to finished surfaces during transit. B. Inspect materials upon delivery for damage. Unless minor defects can be made to meet the Architects specifications and satisfaction, damaged parts shall be removed and replaced. C. Store materials at building site under cover in a dry location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Fully tempered ASTM C 1048 Kind FT, Quality q3. a. Thickness: i. 3/4 inch ii. 1/2 inch iii. 1/4 inch b. Color: Clear, c. Edge: polished
B. Fasteners: a. Types and sizes indicated in shop drawings and engineering report. i. CRL Brushed Stainless Glass Standoff Base and Cap, 1 ii. CRL Laguna Pivot Door System iii. CRL BRL Low Profile Square Aluminum Base Shoe with end caps. b. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (CRL) Tel: (800) 421-6144 Fax: (800) 587-7501
C. Accessories: a. Kwixset cement KWX50 for base shoe. b. Translucent Polyester Film i. Frosted 0.4 cm mini stripes separated by 0.2 cm clear lines.
088000 - 2
5/23/2011
2.2
FABRICATION A. Fabricate assembly components to lengths and configurations complying with shop drawings. B. Machine joint edges smooth and plane to produce hairline seams when site assembled; supply concealed sleeve connectors for joints. C. Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action by applying primer to concealed surfaces of metal components.
PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Standoffs shall be located to a tolerance of 1/32. All bushings, spacers, bearing pads and other components shown in the shop drawings must be properly installed. B. Apply polyester films per manufacturers recommendations at locations noted on Drawings.
3.2
CLEANING
A. Clean glazing surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the manufacturers instructions. Remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt or other substances. B. Remove protective films from metal surfaces. C. Clean railing surfaces with clean water and mild detergent. Do not use abrasive chemicals, detergents, or other implements that may mar or gouge the material.
3.3
PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that all the materials do not incur any damage or deterioration. B. Repair components damaged by subsequent construction activities in accordance with manufacturers recommendations; replace damaged components that cannot be repaired to Architects acceptance.
END OF SECTION
088000 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Sound Attenuation Insulation Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold Rolled Metal Framing" for framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 2.
B.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 A.
FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
5/23/2011
B. C.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 A.
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 A.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 1. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
B.
C.
D.
2.4 A.
TRIM ACCESSORIES Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
5/23/2011
b. c.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.5 A. B.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound .
C.
2.6 A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 Type I: 1. 3 thick at Sandbox walls. 2. 5 thick at Sandbox ceiling. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick
B.
C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. C.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
5/23/2011
3.2 A. B.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL Comply with ASTM C 840. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. When installing gypsum board adjoining existing surface, finish to blend together as one unit.
C.
D.
E. F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3 A.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Install abuse resistive gypsum panels within 4-0 A.F.F. b. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 A.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
5/23/2011
B.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. L or J trim: Use at exposed panel edges, US Gypsum 200-A, US Gypsum 200-B, for taping. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
3.5 A.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
B. C.
D.
3.6 A.
PROTECTION Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other nondrywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
B.
C.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
05/23/2011
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A. B.
SUMMARY Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3 A.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference before beginning installation.
1.4 A. B. C. D.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch square samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
1.5 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4. Suspended ceiling components. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. b. c. Lighting fixtures. Air outlets and inlets. Speakers.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095113 - 1
05/23/2011
d. e. B.
Sprinklers. Access panels.
Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system from ICC-ES.
1.6 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. Impact Clips: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
1.8 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
B.
C.
1.10 A.
FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
095113 - 2
05/23/2011
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. C. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 A.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Source Limitations: 1. 2. C. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
D. E.
F.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide
095113 - 3
05/23/2011
products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Match Existing - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ceiling tile that matches the existing installed product and manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. Chicago Metallic Corporation. Tectum Inc. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. As approved
2.4 A.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. b. c. d. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
B.
C.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M,
D.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanizedsteel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E.
095113 - 4
05/23/2011
F. G.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
H.
2.5 A.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM Basis-of-Design Product: Match Existing - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. Chicago Metallic Corporation. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. As approved.
2.6
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Match Existing - Subject to compliance with requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. Chicago Metallic Corporation. Fry Reglet Corporation. Gordon, Inc. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. As approved
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Relocate sections of existing system as required to align with existing system to remain as indicated on Drawings. Replace sections as required to maintain continuous ceiling. Replace sections damaged during/by construction. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
C.
D. E.
095113 - 5
05/23/2011
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 A.
INSTALLATION General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. 2. 3. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-inplace or postinstalled anchors. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
095113 - 6
05/23/2011
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
F.
3.4 A.
CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspensionsystem members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
095113 - 7
5/23/2011
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Linoleum
B.
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F .
1.6 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3. 48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513-1
5/23/2011
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
C.
1.7 A.
EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 50 linear feet, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
RESILIENT BASE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. B. Flexco, Inc. Roppe Corporation, USA.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. Material Requirement: Rubber. Style: Cove (base with toe).
C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. Height: As indicated on Drawings. Lengths: Provide in 120 ft. rolls. Outside Corners: Job formed. Inside Corners: Job formed. Finish: Matte. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 A.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
B.
096513-2
5/23/2011
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. b. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C.
Sealant: Acrylic latex caulking, as specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
C.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
B.
C.
D.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
3.3 A. B.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install resilient base continuous from inside corner to inside corner. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
C. D.
E.
096513-3
5/23/2011
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. Job-Formed Corners: 1. 2. Outside Corners: Run base continuous around outside corners. Form corners by V cut at backside of base material. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Inside Corners: Form by miter cut. Form to hairline joint.
G.
H.
Base Material Transitions: 1. Make all base material transitions at inside corners, in inconspicuous locations.
I.
Sealant Application: Apply continuous bead of sealant to the top and bottom edge of resilient base. Fill all gaps between base and wall, and base and floor. Tool sealant smooth and flush with base material.
3.4 A. B.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3. C. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
D.
096513-4
5/23/2011
SECTION 096516 - LINOLEUM FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. B. Linoleum sheet flooring.
Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. Division
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. C. Show details of special patterns.
Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals.
D.
E. F.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
B.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
096516 - 1

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
5/23/2011
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright.
1.6 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3. B. 72 hours before installation. During installation. 72 hours after installation.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
C. D. E.
1.7 A.
EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of sheet flooring installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Forbo Flooring, Inc.
2.2 A.
LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING Product: As indicated on Finish Schedule in Drawings.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
096516 - 2

B. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 1. C. D. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.
5/23/2011
Seaming Method: Heat welded. Thickness: 0.10 inch.
2.3 A.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
C.
Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of linoleum floor covering manufacturer. 1. Match linoleum floor covering.
D.
Wainscott Accessories: 1. 2. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. Cap Trim: Aluminum cap, provided or approved by manufacturer.
E.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
C.
3.2 A. B.
PREPARATION Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
096516 - 3

2.
5/23/2011
3. 4.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.
D.
E.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation.
3.3 A. B.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builtin furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. Adhere floor coverings to substrates, both horizontal and vertical, using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
C. D.
E.
F.
3.4 A. B.
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. Avoid cross seams.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
096516 - 4

5.
5/23/2011
Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks).
3.5 A. B.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. 2. 3. C. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s).
D.
E.
After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
096516 - 5
05/23/2011
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A. B.
SUMMARY Section includes modular carpet tile. Related Requirements: 1. 2. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.
1.3 A.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. Review subfloor preparation procedures.
1.4 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. 3. B. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. Transition details to other flooring materials.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. 2. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
C.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 1
05/23/2011
1.5 A. B. C.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. 2. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
1.7 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
1.8 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
B.
1.9 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with CRI 104.
1.10 A. B.
FIELD CONDITIONS Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.
C.
D.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 2
05/23/2011
1.11 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
CARPET TILE Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or comparable product: 1. Mfr.: Patcraft 2. Pattern: Dazzle 0119 3. Color: as selected by Architect 4. Construction: Multi-Level Loop 5. Pile Fiber and Type: Eco Solution Q Nylon 6. Dye Method: 81% solution dyed, 19% yarn dyed 7. Guage: 1/12th 8. Stitches Per Inch: 10 9. Tufted Pile Height: 3/32 low, 6/32 high 10. Tufted yarn Weight: 20 oz. 11. Tile Size: 24 x 24 12. Secondary Backing: EcoWorx Tile
2.2 A.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. 2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B.
C.
Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 3
05/23/2011
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
B.
2. C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3 A.
INSTALLATION General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer Lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. C. D.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 4
05/23/2011
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
F.
G. H.
3.4 A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. 2. 3. B. C. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 099123 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section Metal Fabrications 2. Division 6 Section Interior Finish Carpentry 3. Division 8 Section Steel Doors 4. Division 9 Section Gypsum Board
C.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
D. E.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
PAINTING
099123 - 1
5/23/2011
B.
Samples for Verification: Submit two samples, 6 x 12 inch in size, illustrating selected colors and textures for each finish system and color selected. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
C.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. 2. 3. 4. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.
B.
C.
5.
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
B.
PAINTING
099123 - 2
5/23/2011
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Provide lighting level of 80 ft. candles, measured at mid-height at substrate surface.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A. B. C. D.
MANUFACTURERS Benjamin Moore & Co. Sherwin-Williams Co. Miller Paint Co. Rodda Paint Co.
2.2 A.
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paintmaterial containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
B.
C.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. Colors: Match colors indicated in schedule on Drawings.
E.
2.3
INTERIOR PRIMERS
PAINTING
099123 - 3
5/23/2011
A.
Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. Applied at a dry film
B.
Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal
C.
Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: primer. 1.
Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
2.4 A.
INTERIOR FINISH COATS Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex interior enamel, sheen to match existing. 1. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
2.5 A.
INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated clear satin acrylic-based polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. 2. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
PAINTING
099123 - 4
5/23/2011
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. 2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineralfiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
C.
3.
b. c. d. e.
4.
5.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
APPLICATION
PAINTING
099123 - 5
5/23/2011
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. Apply stains according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Exterior and Interior Trim: Paint face and sides of all trim with scheduled trim paint and color unless otherwise noted. Exterior Soffits and Underside of Roof Eaves: Paint exterior soffits and the underside of roof eaves to match trim color unless otherwise noted.
B.
C. D.
E.
F.
G. H. I. J.
K.
L. M.
N. O.
P.
Q.
R.
PAINTING
099123 - 6
5/23/2011
3.4 A.
CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.
3.5 A.
PROTECTION Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
B.
3.6 A.
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE Gypsum Board: 1. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 2. Finish Coat: Two coats, interior acrylic latex, sheen to match existing. Painted trim: 1. Primer: Interior primer or pre-primed 2. Finish Coat: Two coats, interior acrylic latex, satin sheen. Interior Doors, Frames and Trim: 1. Pre-primed. 2. Finish Coat: Two coats, interior acrylic latex, satin sheen
B.
C.
PAINTING
099123 - 7
5/23/2011
SECTION 102220 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
Part 1 1.1 .1
General DESCRIPTION Single source for movable partitions, inclusive of frames, glass, doors, door hardware, and electrical components were specified. Moveable partitions includes sliding, butt hinge, pivot, frameless glass doors and glazing, manufactured and installed with demountable partitions. Supply and coordination of conduit, boxes and electrical duplexes into electrical and communication components where specified. Integration of voice data and security system components (supplied by others) into demountable partitions. RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS .1 Division 26 Electrical: Electrical materials, installation, and connections. REFERENCES .1 .2 .3 .4 AAMA 611-98 - Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. ANSI/BIFMA X5.6-2003 - American National Standard for Office Furnishings. ASCE 7-05 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. ASTM E72-04- Method for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. ASTM E84-05 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E90-97- Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. ASTM E413-87- Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 203-M91 (R2005 - Modular Wiring Systems for Office Furniture. Limited Production Certification (LPC), Report No. LPCE 75090-1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. UL 1286-2008 Office Furnishings.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
1.3
.5 .6
.7 .8 .9 .10 .11
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
102220 -7
5/23/2011
1.4 .1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: .1 Transverse-Load Capacity of Wall System: Lateral deflection of not more than 1/120 (solid Wall) and 1/175 (glass wall) of the overall span when tested under a uniformly distributed load of 0.24 kN/m2 (5 psf) in accordance with ASTM E72 or calculated by registered engineer.
.2
Seismic Performance: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. .1 .2 .3 Spectral Accelerations for Short Periods (SS): Site specific. Spectral Accelerations for a 1-Second Period (S1): Site specific. Provide miscellaneous bracing not shown on drawings which is required to satisfy seismic criteria.
.3
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: .1 Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide demountable partitions in accordance with ASTM E84, with the following maximum characteristics: .1 Chromacoat MDF Panels: Meets Class B. .2 Fire Rated Chromacoat MDF: Meets Class A. .3 Pre-Finished Veneer on MDF: Meets Class C. .4 Fabric Wrapped MDF: Meets Class C.
.4 1.5 .1 .2
FSC Chain of Custody Certification number is SCS-COC-00848. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Section 013100: Project management and coordination procedures. Coordination: .1 Coordinate other work having a direct bearing on work of this section, including other work required to be installed within or next to Work of this section.
.3
Schedule: .1 .2 Coordinate delivery of product in accordance with construction schedule to avoid storage and double handling of the wall system. Installation of wall system in conjunction with other trades after completion of HVAC equipment, fire suppression, ceiling grid, finished drywall ceiling, floor covering, and lighting fixtures. Final electrical connection, voice data/communications, ceiling tiles, can be completed during or after installation of the wall systems.
1.6 .1
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide product information for each type of product indicated in this specification. 102220 -7
5/23/2011
.2
Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for demountable partitions. .1 .2 .3 Include plans, elevations, sections, connection details, and attachment details to other work. Include critical field measurements for custom modular installation, including finished width and height of partitions. Provide structural analysis data for installed products indicated to comply with design loads, signed and sealed by licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
.3
Coordination Drawings: .1 .2 Provide all final engineered drawings relevant to material inclusions within, or connections to the moveable wall product. Provide architectural plans locating movable wall products, including wall finishes and construction of surfaces with which the moveable wall system interfaces with or connects to. Provide reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which penetrations and ceiling mounted items are shown and coordinated with demountable partitions. Electrical Drawings: Coordinate electrical provisions to be included in moveable partitions with final circuited electrical engineering drawings and schedules.
.3 .4 .4
Samples: Provide samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, in sample size indicated below. .1 .2 .3 .4 Panel Finish Face and Extrusion Components: Manufacturer's standard size unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square. Linear Trim: 300 mm (12 inches) long. Door Face Finish: Manufacturer's standard sized unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard sized unit, but not less than 75 mm (3 inches) square.
.5
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of demountable partition. Evaluation/Certification Reports: .1 .2 .3 LARR (Los Angeles Research Report) 25604, based on ICC ESR (Evaluation Service Report). ESR-1947 (reissued 2007): Provide evidence of compliance with structural performance requirements and the building code. Limited Production Certification (LPC), Report No. LPCE 75090-1: Provide evidence of compliance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 203 and UL 1286 for modular wiring systems for office furniture.
.6
.7
Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for demountable partitions for incorporation into operation and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7
102220 -7
5/23/2011
.1
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Mechanical Strength of Demountable Partitions: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding static loads in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA X5.6. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.2
1.8 .1 1.9 .1
Conform to ADA Guidelines for accessibility requirements. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install demountable partition components until building is enclosed and finishing operations are complete, including ceiling and floor-covering installation and painting.
Part 2 2.1 .1 .2
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS DIRTT Environmental Solutions; Moveable Solid and Glass Walls. Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products. .1 .2 .3 Steelcase Herman Millar
Substitutions: Refer to Section 013300 DEMOUNTABLE UNITIZED PANEL PARTITIONS
2.2 .1
Solid Panels .1 .2 .3 Aluminum Framing: Aluminum extrusions, 6063-T54 or 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. Face Mounted Tile Attachment: Provide unitized frame assembly to accept face mounted tiles with orientation and module increments as specified. Frame Accessibility: Provide up to 75 mm (3 inches) clear wall cavity for distribution of utilities accessible from either side of wall by removable face panels. Face Panels: .1 Thicknesses: 13 mm (1/2 inch). .2 Width and Height: As indicated. .3 Face Tile Type: As indicated on Drawings Electrical, Communications, and Security System Requirements: Provide for installation of electrical, communications, and security system items arranged so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
.4
.5
102220 -7
5/23/2011
.1
.2
.3
Conduit: Provide option for metal conduit in cavity of demountable partitions, from outlet and device boxes to top or bottom of demountable partitions to permit wiring installation and connections as specified in Division 26. .1 Refer to Division 26 Sections for metal conduit raceway and pull wire requirements. Boxes: Provide outlet and device boxes in cavity of demountable partitions for all outlets and devices indicated. Provide metal junction and pull boxes where indicated or required. Electrical, Communications, and Security System Components: Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for demountable partitions to accept electrical, communications, and security system components.
.2
Glass Panels .1 Aluminum Glazing Framing: Aluminum extrusions, 6063-T54 or 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. .1 Frame Finishes: Clear-anodized aluminum .2 Clear Anodized aluminum; AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II. Glazing: Glass type as indicated on drawings.
.2 .3
Frame Bases: .1 .2 Provide frame bases with provisions for height adjustment to accommodate floor slab variances. Provide a leveling mechanism for making fine adjustment in height over adjustment range of the product.
.4
Connections and Supports: Manufacturer's standard connections and supports that connect and release from floor and ceiling without damage using carpet grippers and ceiling track clips, with exception of the following conditions: bulkhead (drywall ceiling), seismic conditions, electrical or service feeds, physical connections to base building (where required). Panel Joint Closure: Manufacturer's standard, capable of closing up to a 25 mm (1 inch) gap between demountable partitions and base building elements. Trim: Continuous and modular, factory-finished, snap-on type; adjustable for variations in floor and ceiling levels. .1 .2 .3 Base Trim Profiles: Recessed; removable to access leveling mechanisms. Ceiling Trim Profile: Recessed; adjustable to accommodate up to a 12 mm (1/2 inch) gap between demountable partitions and base building elements. Wall Trim Profile: Recessed; adjustable to accommodate up to a 12 mm (1/2 inch) up to 25 mm (1 inch) gap between demountable partitions and base building elements. Panel to Panel Profile: As detailed. Colours: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
.5
.6
.4 .5
102220 -7
5/23/2011
2.3 .1
DOORS Frameless Rotating door: Manufacturer's standard solid core door, rotating operation .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .2 Door Thickness: 43 mm (1-11/16 inches) thick. Pressed high density fibreboard skin on both sides of door on particleboard core. Facing: Wood veneer, White Oak Edging: Solid edging, White Oak Blocking: All edges and centered on pivot point. Door Height: as indicated on Drawings Rotating Hardware: by partition manufacturer
Sliding Door: .1 See Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
2.4
HARDWARE .1 As specified in 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork or manufacturers standard. ACCESSORIES .1 Accessories and Brackets: .1 Manufacturer's brackets, supports and accessories for complete installation of system's furniture components, architectural millwork, audio visual equipment, and paper accessories. Provide bracket design to enable other system furniture to mount to DIRTT walls, on or off module.
2.5
.2
2.6 .1
FABRICATION Demountable Unitized Panels: .1 .2 .3 .4 .2 Factory-Assembled frames with 25 mm (1inch) insulation, base track and levellers; face mounted tiles installed to frames on site. Fabricate panels for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit components that will not damage ceiling or floor covering exceptions. Fabricate panels with continuous light-and-sound seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where panels abut fixed construction. Factory glaze panels to the greatest extent possible.
Components: .1 Fabricate components for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Exceptions: Drywall ceiling, seismic applications and doors against base building require screw holes in base building for proper fastening. Fabricate for installation with continuous seals at floor and other locations where partition assemblies abut fixed construction and for installation of sound attenuation insulation in partition cavities. 102220 -7
.2
5/23/2011
.3
Electrical, Communications, and Security System Components: Fabricate demountable partitions to accept electrical, communications, and security systems components specified in Division 26. FINISHES
2.7 .1 .2
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage during shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: .1 .2 .3 Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Part 3 3.1 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Execution INSTALLATION Install demountable partition systems to manufacturer's written instructions. Install system rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Apply finished face mounted tiles to framing. Install continuous insulation in base trim cavity. Install seals to prevent light and sound transmission at connections to floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces. Install doors and frames, glazing, and glazing frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with doors aligned and fitted. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation. DEMONSTRATION .1 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain demountable partitions.
.6
.7 3.2
END OF SECTION
102220 -7
5/23/2011
SECTION 105200 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. Portable fire extinguishers. Cabinets.
1.2
ALLOWANCE Allow for (2) fire extinguishers and cabinets. Locate according to fire marshals direction. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. 2. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
1.5 A. B. C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. COORDINATION
1.6
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
105200 - 1
5/23/2011
A.
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. MANUFACTURERS J.L. Industries. Larsens Mfg. Co. Kidde. MATERIALS Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet) PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated; 60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. B. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. C. D. E. F. G. H. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
2.4
Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. Door Material: Steel sheet. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Accessories: 1. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.
105200 - 2
5/23/2011
2. I. 2.5 A.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
Finishes: Manufacturers standard baked-enamel paint. FABRICATION Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. 2. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. C. 3.3 A. EXAMINATION Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. INSTALLATION General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Relocate existing fire protection cabinets as appropriate. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
105200 - 3
5/23/2011
B. C. D.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet manufacturer. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E.
105200 - 4
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY REMODEL
5/23/2011
SECTION 210000 - BASIC FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN BUILD REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SECTION INCLUDES Work included in 21 00 00 applies to Division 21 work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of fire protection systems for proposed project. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work. Definitions: 1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. 3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete Item of work furnished. 4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01 requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted Item. 5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance. RELATED SECTIONS: A. B. Contents of Section applies to Division 21 Contract Documents. Related Work: 1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to: a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. b. Drawings c. Addenda d. Owner/Architect Agreement e. Owner/Contractor Agreement f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 21 Sections and those listed in this section. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from: 1. State of Oregon:
B.
C.
1.2
1.3
B.
BASIC FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN BUILD REQUIREMENTS
210000 - 1
5/23/2011
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. C.
OAR Oregon Administrative Rules OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code OFC Oregon Fire Code OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code OPSC Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code Oregon Elevator Specialty Code
General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from: 1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 2. AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute 4. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 5. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 6. ASHRAE Guideline, the Commissioning Process 7. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 8. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 9. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 10. ASTM ASTM International 11. AWWA American Water Works Association 12. CSA CSA International 13. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 14. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 15. FDA Food & Drug Administration 16. FM FM Global 17. FM Global FM Global Approval Guide 18. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Official 19. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 20. ICC-ESR International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports 21. HI Hydraulic Institute Standards 22. ISO International Organization for Standardization 23. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design 24. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society 25. NEC National Electric Code 26. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 27. NFPA National Fire Protection Association: a. NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems b. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code c. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 28. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 29. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 30. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. 31. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 32. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 33. USDA United States Department of Agriculture Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.
D.
210000 - 2
5/23/2011
E.
Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials across the board. SUBMITTALS
F.
1.4 A.
See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 21 sections. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions. General: Shop Drawings, calculations, product data sheets: Submit as one complete standalone package to AHJ, Owner's insurance underwriter and Engineer. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 21 sections. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted Item and the specified Item Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings. 1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed Item. Highlight connections by/to other trades. 2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Refer to Division 21 specification sections for specific Item required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. 3. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise criteria, etc. for equipment. 4. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection. Indicate frame type where required. Submit manufacturer's product data. 5. See Division 21 sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements. 6. Maximum of two reviews provided of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead Item; Bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13 requirements for non structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building Occupancy Category III, Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor of 1.5.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
210000 - 3
5/23/2011
G.
Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 21 coordination documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26 and Division 28 submittals. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design: Basis-of-Design systems, components, and controls for equipment are selected and sized based on the equipment specified as the first-named manufacturer, model number and supplemental additional options as indicated in the Contract Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the Item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment and piping layout, pipe layout, hanger layout, sway brace layout, seismic restraints, sway brace calculations, drains, location of drain discharge, risers, valves, details, water test information, physical device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Refer to individual Division 21 sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. 1. Provide Shop Drawings which indicate information required by NFPA 13. Include room names and fire sprinkler occupancy hazard classifications. 2. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Hydraulic Information Sign for each hydraulic remote area calculated. 3. Utilizing the Reflected Ceiling backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations of fire sprinklers and piping. 4. Utilizing the Structural backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations and types of hangers and sway braces. 5. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of hanger, including fasteners to structure. 6. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of branchline restraint and sway brace, including length of sway brace member, sway brace fittings, minimum and maximum angles from vertical of sway brace member, method of attachment to structure, size, length and embedment of attachment to structure and size and type of structural member to which sway brace will be attached. Number each type of restraint and sway brace. Indicate on Drawings locations of each type of numbered restraint and sway brace. 7. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Sprinkler System General Information Sign. 8. When required, provide Coordination Drawings. 9. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections. Calculations: Submit hydraulic and sway brace and the like calculations. 1. Hydraulic Calculations: a. Include friction losses between the hydraulically most remote design area and the hydrant flow test pressure hydrant.
H.
I.
J.
K. L.
210000 - 4
5/23/2011
b.
2.
3.
Hydraulic calculations to be performed on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculation program, with coversheets in the format required by the latest edition of NFPA 13. Hydraulic calculations performed by hand or not on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculations program will be returned without review by engineer. c. Provide one or more hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area. d. Where it is not obvious which area is most hydraulically remote, perform and submit for review additional hydraulic calculations proving the hydraulically most remote area. e. For grid systems, either provide peaked hydraulic calculations, or provide two additional sets of hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area. Sway Brace Calculations: a. Sway brace calculations utilizing a proprietary computer calculation program only used for the sway brace components supported by that manufacturer. For example, only manufacturer X sway brace components, and not those of another manufacturer, may be calculated on a "manufacturer X sway brace computer calculation program. b. Shop Drawings and hydraulics calculations, sway brace calculations, trapeze hanger calculations, and the like, to be prepared under the direct supervision and control of a Professional Engineer competent to do such work and licensed in the state of Oregon. Drawings and calculations to bear the seal and wet signature of the professional Engineer. Resubmission Requirements: Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The Engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Clearly indicate changes on Drawings and cloud changes in the submittals. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make "corrections as noted".
M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals/Owners Instructions: 1. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) on CD/DVD of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or Item requiring servicing. Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. a. Include copies of certificates of code authority acceptance, code-required acceptance tests; test reports and certificates, b. Include Warranty per Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual sections. c. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. d. Include Record Drawings, e. Include copy of water supply flow test used as basis for hydraulic calculations. f. Include hydraulic calculations and sway brace calculations. g. Include Contractors Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping/Underground Piping. h. Include a copy of NFPA 25. i. Include a copy of valve charts and whether normally open or normally closed. j. Include a copy of drain, auxiliary, and low point drains charts. k. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project. l. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment: i.e. belts, motors, lubricants, and filters. m. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies. n. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment.
210000 - 5
5/23/2011
o.
2.
3.
Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 21 00 00 Article titled "Demonstration". Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
N.
Record Drawings: 1. Maintain at site at least one set of Drawings for recording As-constructed conditions. Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical Item. Include Item changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions. 2. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. 3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon substantial completion. 4. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for water services and drainage piping below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line. 5. Record Drawings to include site information or reference site information for complete understanding of the fire protection system between the building and the point of connection to the water supply and location of flow test pressure hydrants. 6. See Division 21 individual sections for additional Item to include in record drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 A.
Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State, Federal and other applicable laws and regulations. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis-of-Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every Item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-of-Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA listed. WARRANTY
B.
C.
D.
E. 1.6 A.
Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 Sections.
210000 - 6
5/23/2011
B.
Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01 and the General Conditions. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
1.7 A.
Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, plumbing equipment/fixtures, fire sprinklers, fire alarm, plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including fire alarm, ceiling suspension and tile systems), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, and finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence. Advise Architect in the event a conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Provide like Item from one manufacturer, including but not limited to fixtures, pumps, drains and equipment. MATERIALS A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, FM, ICC-ES, and CSA approved for their intended fire protection function or have adequate approval or be acceptable by State, County, and City authorities. Articles and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance as defined by EPA, including but not limited to, arsenic, lead, asbestos, or volatile organic compound (VOC).
2.2
B. C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections.
210000 - 7
5/23/2011
B.
Install equipment requiring access (i.e. drains, control operators, valves, motors, engines, pumps, controllers, air compressors, gauges, fill cups, tanks, cleanouts and the like) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines. Firestopping: Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21 Sections and the following: Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM International E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. Pipe Installation: 1. Coordinate work to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating coordinating installation of piping systems. 2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping. Plenums: Provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy. SEISMIC CONTROL
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2 A.
Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections. General: 1. Provide fire suppression equipment and piping, both hanging and base mounted, with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist lateral seismic forces equal to 0.5 of equipment operating weight or lateral seismic forces as determined by building code and NFPA 13 calculations, whichever is more demanding. 2. Seismic Design Category: D Soils. 3. Occupancy Category: III. 4. Importance Factor (l-p): Equipment importance factor of 1.5. 5. See Structural Drawings for seismic design criteria for sway bracing and seismic restraint. 6. Earthquake resistant designs for Fire Protection (Division 21) equipment and distribution, i.e. fire sprinkler systems, fire standpipe systems, fire pumps, fire pump controllers, fire tanks, clean agent fire suppression systems, etc. conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority. 7. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
B.
210000 - 8
5/23/2011
8.
9.
10.
Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping, equipment, tanks, pumps controllers and the like. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details. Coordinate exact design requirements with project Structural Engineer. Flexible drops for sprinklers in conformance with Building Code and ASCE 7 requirements of ceilings. Coordinate with Architectural and Structural Drawings and Specifications.
C. D.
Piping: Per NFPA 13, ASCE-7 and local requirements. Equipment: Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" latest edition published by SMACNA, ASCE 7 and local requirements. REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
3.3 A.
Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation: 1. Underground piping installation prior to backfilling. 2. Prior to covering walls. 3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation. 4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ. 5. When mains or branchlines are to be permanently concealed by construction or insulation systems. 6. When fire suppression systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ. 7. Bear responsibility and cost to make piping accessible, to expose concealed lines, or to demonstrate acceptability of the system. If Contractor fails to notify Architect at times prescribed above, costs incurred by removal of such work are the responsibility of the Contractor. 8. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
B.
3.4 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21 sections and the following: 1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed. 2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every Item is thoroughly prepared. Install new piping, and wiring to point of connection. 3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference at a minimum. If overtime is required, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work. 4. During entire time system, or part thereof, is not operational, provide a firewatch per Fire Code, including a watchperson whose sole duty is to watch for and report fires. 5. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption. CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.5 A.
Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21 sections and the following:
210000 - 9
5/23/2011
1.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. 3.6 A.
Cutting and patching performed under Division 21 includes, but is not limited to: a. Cutting and patching of plaster or partitions. b. Cutting and patching of finished ceilings. Perform cutting and patching by skilled craftsmen in trade of work to be performed. Fill holes which are cut oversized for completed work. Match refinished areas with existing adjacent finish in a manner acceptable to Architect. When masonry to concrete construction must be penetrated, provide a steel pipe sleeve in opening and grout in place in a neat manner. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. Provide escutcheons. If sleeves are not provided, core drill penetrations. Locate concealed utilities to eliminate possible service interruption or damage. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s). Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, landscaping, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work. Repair mutilation of building around pipes, equipment, hangers, and braces.
EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing at no additional cost to Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21 sections and the following: 1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage and deterioration. Store materials in original containers which identify manufacturer, name, brand and model numbers on site inside building or protected from weather, sun, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation. 2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. 3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar Item until in service. DEMONSTRATION A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections.
3.7
3.8
210000 - 10
5/23/2011
B.
Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 Sections. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations. Prior to acceptance of work and during time designated by Architect, provide necessary qualified personnel to operate system for a period of two hours. Instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system, including main valve position (open or closed) recognition, system drainage, system testing, dry pipe valve reset and the relation to the fire alarm system. Operations and Maintenance Data: At time of system demonstration, deliver to Owner two bound copies (3-ring binder type) of operation and maintenance manuals containing the following materials: 1. Catalog description of each Item of equipment actually installed on job. 2. Instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression systems composed of operating instructions, maintenance instructions and manufacturer's literature as follows: a. Manufacturer's Literature: Provide copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression equipment, including replacement parts list with name and address of nearest distributor. Mark each copy with equipment identification label as listed in equipment schedule, i.e. F-5, etc. b. Hydraulic calculations. c. Seismic sway brace calculations. d. Location of each valve. e. Location of drains, auxiliary drains, low paint drains, method of complete drainage. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems to demonstrate to Owner's Representative and Architect that equipment is furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications. CLEANING
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.9 A.
Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections. Upon completion of installation, except for sprinklers, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work. Sprinklers may not be cleaned except for vacuuming in a manner in which no part of the sprinkler is touched by the vacuuming equipment. Replace sprinklers which bear traces of foreign substances with sprinklers of same model, temperature, K-factor, orifice, finish, style, orientation, and the like. INSTALLATION
B.
C.
3.10 A.
Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections.
210000 - 11
5/23/2011
B.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, in the presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide pump impellers to obtain Basis-of-Design design capacities. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and piping. DEMOLITION
C.
D. 3.11 A.
Confirm Demolition requirements in Division 01 and Division 02. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual sections in Division 21 and the following: 1. Scope: a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to fire protection system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work. b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged Item with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings. 2. Equipment and Piping: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, piping, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other Item not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner. 3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap piping and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish. 4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings). 5. Coordinate demolition of existing fire suppression systems with Contractor. Where applicable or possible, portions of fire suppression demolition work may be performed by Contractor. Verify with local AHJ as to limitations of demolition by others and not fire suppression trades. Coordinate extent of demolition of fire suppression work to be done by others and supervise this work. No extra costs will be approved by replacement of systems due to improper or excessive demolition. ACCEPTANCE
3.12 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual sections in Division 21 and the following: 1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following: a. Testing reports including Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping, Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping, Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Private Fire Service Mains, Fire pump acceptance test data report, and the like. b. Cleaning c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals d. Training of Operating Personnel e. Record Drawings f. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates g. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports h. Letter of Conformance
210000 - 12
5/23/2011
3.13 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 21 00 00 and individual Division 21 sections. Upon completion of installation of equipment, sprinklers, hose valves and piping and after units are water pressurized, test system to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning Item at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new Item and proceed with retesting. Inspect each installed Item for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original, except fire sprinklers, at site; otherwise, remove Item and replace with new Item Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect. Remove cracked or dented Item and replace with new Item. Fire sprinklers may not be reused, or cleaned, except for dusting. Replace damaged, field painted, oversprayed, overcoated or field coated sprinklers with new sprinklers of same manufacturer, model, finish, K-factor and performance characteristics. Where identical replacement sprinklers are not available, provide sprinklers of similar finish, style, K-factor and performance characteristics. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize fire protection equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING A. Prior to connection of piping to existing piping or utilities, field verify existing conditions and exact sizes and locations of existing piping. Provide additional offsets, transitions, joints, cut-ins, and replace portions of existing as required to facilitate connections of new.
B.
C.
D.
3.14
3.15
END OF SECTION
210000 - 13
5/23/2011
SECTION 210100 - WATER BASED BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Product Standards 2. Fire-Suppression Screw Thread Connections 3. Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings 4. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings 5. Wall and Floor Penetrations and Sleeves 6. Hangers and Supports 7. Sway Braces and Restraints 8. Anchors and Attachments 9. Pipe Valve and Fire Protection Equipment Identification RELATED SECTIONS A. B. Contents of Division 21 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. In addition, reference the following: 1. Division 26, Electrical 2. Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security, Section 28 30 00 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. FLOW TEST A. Provide materials and labor for a new water supply test on the closest nearby fire hydrants per NFPA 13, and NFPA 291.
1.2
1.3
1.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
WATER BASED BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS
210100 - 1
5/23/2011
A.
Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings: 1. Fittings, Mechanical and Grooved Couplings: a. Victaulic b. Gruvlok c. Or approved equivalent. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings: 1. Flexhead 2. Or approved equivalent. Hangers and Supports: 1. Tolco 2. Afcon 3. Anvil 4. International 5. ITW Buildex Sammys 6. Or approved equivalent. Sway Braces and Restraints: 1. Tolco 2. Afcon 3. Or approved equivalent. Anchors and Attachments: 1. Attachments: a. Hilti b. Powers c. Or approved equivalent. PRODUCT STANDARDS
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2 A.
Material and Equipment: Listed for its intended fire protection use in current UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory, or UL Online Certifications Directory for Fire Protection, International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports,, or FM Global Approval Guide, new and of current manufacture. Where pressures are expected to exceed 175 PSI, provide products for high pressure or extra high pressure service. Provide per AHJ requirements. References to product Specifications for materials are listed according to accepted base standards. Materials to meet latest approved versions of these standards. See Section 21 00 00, Basic Fire Protection Design Build Requirements where piping materials are approved for use. FIRE-SUPPRESSION SCREW THREAD CONNECTIONS
B.
C. D.
E.
2.3 A.
Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local fire department/fire marshal regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fire department connections.
210100 - 2
5/23/2011
2.4 A.
ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Pipe: Size 2-inch Diameter and Smaller: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; Schedule 40 or Minimum Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) of 1.00 per UL Listing or FM Global Approval. Allied BLT/XL is not permitted. Pipe: Size 2-1/2-inch Diameter and Larger: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; Schedule 10 or Minimum CRR of 1.00 per UL Listing or FM Global approval. Wall thickness greater than Schedule 5. Schedule 5 not approved. Exposed pipe 8'-0 or less above finished floor: A minimum of Schedule 40. Joints: Threaded, flanged or bevel welded. Piping installed in plenums or shafts to have welded joints. Fittings, Threaded: 1. Malleable Iron: Class 150 and Class 300, ANSI B16.3. 2. Cast Iron: Class 125 and 250, ANSI B16.3. Fittings, Flanged: 1. Cast Iron: Class 125 and 250, ASME B16.1, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. Fittings, Welded: 1. Carbon Steel: Long radius, standard weight or extra strong. a. Factory Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings: ASME B16.9. 1) Buttwelding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges, and Fittings: ASME B16.25. 2) Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures: ASTM A234. 3) Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 4) Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded: ASME B16.11. Fittings, Mechanical and Grooved Couplings: 1. Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A536 ductile iron or ASTM A47 malleable iron, with enamel finish and grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings. Synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design, and ASTM A183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts. FM Global approved. Victaulic or Gruvlok. FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS A. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. 175 psi. Ceiling bracket: galvanized steel, direct attachment type, with integrated snap-on clip ends positively attached to ceiling with tamper-resistant screws and removable flexible hose attachment with set screw. FM1637, UL 2443, ICC-ES AC-156. Flexhead. WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES A. Below Grade and High Water Table Areas: Link-Seal Pipe Sleeves: Neoprene gasket links bolted together around an interior sleeve forming a watertight seal. Pre-Engineered Firestop Pipe Penetration Systems: UL Listed assemblies for maintaining fire rating of piping penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with ASTM E814.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
2.6
B.
210100 - 3
5/23/2011
2.7 A.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS General: 1. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping. 2. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Hangers: 1. Ferrous. Tolco, Afcon, Anvil International, or ITW Buildex Sammys. 2. ITW Buildex Sammys with FM Approval only are not allowed in certain seismic zones. Verify with FM that FM Approval is effective in projects seismic zone. Hanger Rods: 1. Concealed Spaces: Continuously threaded or threaded ends. 2. Exposed Spaces: Threaded ends. Channel Type Strut and Strut Clamps: Only models UL Listed or FM Approved for fire protection. SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS A. Sway Bracing: From a single manufacturer and compatible with sway brace calculation program. Tolco or Afcon. ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS A. General: Anchor supports to masonry, concrete and block walls per anchoring system manufacturers recommendations, or as modified by project Structural Engineer. Attachments in Concrete: 1. Suitable for hanging and bracing fire protection systems in concrete which is subject to cracking in a seismic event. 2. Compatible with International Code Council Evaluation Service Acceptance Criteria AC-193 and AC308 for expansion, screw and adhesive anchors. 3. See Structural Drawings for additional information regarding acceptable attachments. Attachment products listed in structural Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the following products. If no structural Drawings or Specification provided, then choose from the following: Hilti Kwikbolt TZ, Powers - Snake+, Powers Power-Stud+SD2 or Powers Wedge-Bolt. 4. Cast-in-Place Anchors: Tolco or Afcon.
B.
C.
D. 2.8
2.9
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. FIRE-SUPPRESSION SCREW THREAD CONNECTIONS Coordinate with requirements of local AHJ. ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Pressure Piping Routing: 1. Route piping, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (sloped to drain). Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal routes parallel with walls and beam lines.
210100 - 4
5/23/2011
2.
3.
4.
Install piping as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations on Drawings or, if not indicated, install piping to provide the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building and its equipment. Support piping adjacent to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to 2-inches wherever furring is indicated for concealment of piping. Allow for insulation thickness. Locate insulated piping to provide minimum 1-inch clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating within column or beam enclosures, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal routes in solid partitions, except where approved.
B.
Couplings: Install where indicated on Drawings and on each side of pieces of equipment to permit easy removal of equipment. Deburr cut edges. Pipe Penetrations: Wire pipe cutout coupon at point of pipe penetration. FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS
C. 3.3 A. B.
For hydraulic calculations, include friction loss per manufacturer's schedule of equivalent feet. When flexible sprinkler hose fittings are added to an existing system, provide hydraulic calculations verifying the design flow rate will be achieved. WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
3.4 A.
Escutcheons: 1. Install on exposed pipes passing through walls or floors. a. Pipe Sleeves: Lay out work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set sleeves necessary to complete work. b. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Extend sleeve 1-inch above finished floor. Caulk pipes passing through floor with nonshrinking fire and water resistant grout or approved equivalent caulking compound. Provide "Link-Seal" sleeve sealing system for slab on grade. Caulk/seal piping passing through fire rated building assembly with UL rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements. c. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk pipes passing through walls with nonshrinking caulking compound. Caulk/seal piping passing through fire-rated building assemblies with UL Listed or FM Approved fire-rated firestopping compound. Provide firerated assemblies per local AHJ requirements. d. Beam Sleeves: 1) Coordinate with trades for locations of pipe sleeves in reinforced concrete and steel beams. Penetrations must be indicated on structural shop drawings. See Drawings and Specifications for specific sleeve location limitations. Pipe sleeve locations must be indicated on reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawings. Field cutting of beams not allowed without written approval of structural engineer. No extra costs allowed for failure to coordinate beam penetrations prior to reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawing submittal. 2) Firestopping penetrations in fire-rated wall/floor assemblies. 3) Refer to Division 7. 4) Coordinate with Drawings location of fire rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping and equipment with approved firestopping material.
210100 - 5
5/23/2011
5)
6)
Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814 and NFPA. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814.
3.5 A.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Space pipe hangers no more than 4-feet on center for exposed sprinkler pipe located 8-0 or less above finished floor. Limit branch line overhangs to 4-inches or less. SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS A. B. Locate per orientation and spacing as required by sway brace calculations. Attach sway bracing directly to pipe or equipment being braced. ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS A. In post-tension construction, determine location of post-tension cables and install anchors to avoid contact or interference with post-tension cables. Coordinate with Structural. Do not use powder-driven attachments. PIPE VALVE AND FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Piping to bear the manufacturer's name, schedule of thickness, size and ASTM identification number SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT A. When returning a water-based fire protection system to service after impairment or control valve closure, verify the system is in working order by performing a main drain test per NFPA 25. NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Install vibration isolators and measures required to prevent noise and vibration from being transmitted to occupied areas. Select equipment to operate within noise coefficient (NC) design level for particular type of installation in relation to its location. After installation, make proper adjustments to reduce noise and vibration to acceptable levels as defined by Architect. In acoustically sensitive areas, design system in a manner that minimizes the number of wall penetrations. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Expansion and Flexibility: Install work with due regard for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to the piping, equipment, building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, approved type expansion joints, sway bracing, wire restraints, vertical restraints, flexible couplings or other means to control pipe movement and to minimize pipe forces.
3.6
3.7
B. 3.8
3.9
3.10
B.
C.
3.11
210100 - 6
5/23/2011
B.
Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Obtain Architect's and Engineer's approval of exposed piping installation. Coordinate support of pipe 4-inches and larger with Structural Engineer. Provide clearances around piping per NFPA 13. Coordinate installation with other trades. Route piping as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, HVAC piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts and similar work. Final location of lighting will have priority over final sprinkler locations. Provide drains to trapped sections of system which result from such routing. Other trades take precedence for installation space. General Electrical Equipment Clearances: Do not route piping through electrical rooms, transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Within equipment rooms, provide minimum 3-feet lateral clearance from sides of electric switchgear panels. Do not route piping above electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, or similar electric device. Coordinate with electrical and coordinate exact pipe routing to provide proper clearance with such Item.
C. D. E.
F.
END OF SECTION
210100 - 7
5/23/2011
SECTION 211300 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Sprinklers This is a bidder design system. Contact Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to bid to verify fire system requirements. Provide design compliant with codes as interpreted by AHJ. Scope: 1. Revision and extension of existing system to new and remodeled areas. 2. Sprinkler protection for areas subject to 40 degrees F and lower: a. Dry-pipe sprinkler system, dry sprinklers in areas subject to 40 degrees F or less. b. Antifreeze system in areas subject to 40 degrees F or less. Antifreeze systems limited to nonCPVC systems of 40 gallons and smaller. Coordinate location and type of tamper, flow, and pressure switches, and fire alarm system. Provide electrical connections and wiring as required for a complete and operable system. Includes but is not limited to air compressors, sump pumps, fire pumps, jockey pumps, and pump controllers. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. Contents of Division 21 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. In addition, reference the following: 1. Section 21 00 00, Basic Fire Protection Design Build Requirements. 2. Section 21 01 00, Water Based Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
C.
D. E.
1.2
1.3
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211300 - 1
5/23/2011
1.7 A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide coverage for building areas as indicated. Field verify field conditions prior to submittal of bid. Adjust bid to provide protection features in accordance with applicable codes and interpretations by AHJ. Provide design and installation based on more stringent requirements if AHJ requirements differ from Code. Design Parameters: Assign sprinkler systems design requirements as defined in Code to areas, and obtain approvals for these requirements from appropriate reviewing authority. These requirements include hazard classifications, sprinkler temperature ratings, density, sprinkler area, and water supply requirements. Provide fire pump with Code-required appurtenances and electrical requirements for complete and working water supply system if results of water supply test and hydraulic calculations indicate need for a booster pump. Provide design and installation based on more stringent requirement if AHJ requirements differ from Code. Sprinkler system design to include a 10 percent pressure and flow cushion between system demand point and available water supplies. Extend hydraulic calculations from hydraulically most remote design area back to location of pressure hydrant of flow test or effective point of water supply where characteristics of water supply are known. Develop cost-effective designs that may include use of extended coverage sprinklers and design area reductions as allowed by NFPA 13. EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra sprinklers per code; provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type, and metal storage cabinet in riser room.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers as specified in individual articles below. GENERAL Sprinklers: 1. Finished Areas: a. Viking b. Tyco c. Reliable d. Victaulic e. Globe f. Or approved equivalent. 2. Nonfinished Areas: a. Viking b. Tyco c. Reliable d. Victaulic e. Globe
211300 - 2
5/23/2011
f. 2.3 A.
Or approved equivalent.
SPRINKLERS Finished Areas: 1. Type: Glass-Bulb 2. Style: Recessed 3. Finish: Chrome 4. Escutcheon: Chrome Nonfinished Areas: 1. Type: Glass-Bulb 2. Finish: Brass Pendent sprinklers supplied by dry or preaction piping: Dry pendent type.
B.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. GENERAL Coordinate location of auxiliary drains with Architect. Architect to approve location before drain is installed. Protect valves from tampering or accidental operation. Smoke Control Coordination: Coordinate work with HVAC smoke control zoning requirements. Provide separate sprinkler zone control station with valve, supervisory switch, check valve, gauge and flow switch for each smoke control zone. SPRINKLERS A. B. Center sprinklers in center quarter points of suspended ceiling tile. Align sprinklers with architectural column lines, lighting, diffusers, and other ceiling features. In unfinished ceilings, route piping to minimize visual impact. Sprinklers and piping not so aligned are to be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
B.
3.2
END OF SECTION
211300 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 230000 - BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SECTION INCLUDES Work included in 23 00 00 applies to Division 23 work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems for proposed project. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work. Definitions: 1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. 3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work provided. 4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01 requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items. 5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance. RELATED SECTIONS: A. B. Contents of Section applies to Division 23 Contract Documents. Related Work: 1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to: a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. b. Drawings c. Addenda d. Owner/Architect Agreement e. Owner/Contractor Agreement f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. References and Standards per Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 23 Sections and those listed in this section. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from: 1. State of Oregon:
B.
C.
1.2
1.3
B.
BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
230000 - 1
5/23/2011
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. C.
OAR Oregon Administrative Rules OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code OFC Oregon Fire Code OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code OPSC Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code OEESC Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code Oregon Elevator Specialty Code
General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from: 1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 2. AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute 3. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 4. ANSI American National Standards Institute 5. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 6. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers 7. ASHRAE Guideline, The Commissioning Process 8. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 9. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 11. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 12. ASTM ASTM International 13. AWWA American Water Works Association 14. CFR Code of Federal Regulations 15. CGA Canadian Gas Association 16. CHPS Collaborative for High Performance Schools 17. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 18. CSA CSA International 19. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 20. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 21. FDA Food and Drug Administration 22. FM FM Global 23. GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association 24. HI Hydraulic Institute Standards 25. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Officials 26. ISO International Organization for Standardization 27. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design 28. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society 29. NEC National Electric Code 30. NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association 31. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 32. NFGC National Fuel Gas Code 33. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 34. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 35. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 36. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. 37. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufactures Association 38. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufactures Association 39. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 40. USDA United States Department of Agriculture See Division 23 individual sections for additional references.
D.
230000 - 2
5/23/2011
E.
Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials across the board. SUBMITTALS
F.
G.
1.4 A.
See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 23 sections. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 23 sections. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings. 1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades. 2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Refer to individual Division 23 Specification sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. 3. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise criteria, etc. for equipment. 4. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection. 5. See Division 23 individual sections for additional submittal requirements. Maximum of two reviews of submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of these additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet Section 230548. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building Occupancy Category III. Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor of 1.0
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
230000 - 3
5/23/2011
G.
Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required by Division 23 Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26 submittals. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design: 1. Basis-of-Design systems, components and controls for equipment are selected and sized based on the equipment specified as the first-named, model number and supplemental additional options as indicated in the Contract Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment, ductwork and piping layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Refer to individual Division 23 Specification sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. 1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations for items that require Code or maintenance access, size and elevation for approval prior to installation. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections. Resubmission Requirements: 1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud changes in the submittals. a. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make "corrections as noted". b. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
H.
I.
J.
K. L.
M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owners Instructions: 1. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) on CD/DVD of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project. b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment: belts, motors, lubricants, and filters. c. Include Warranty per Division 00 and Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual sections. d. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees.
230000 - 4
5/23/2011
e.
2.
3.
Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies. f. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include copy of final air and water systems balancing log along with pump, fan and distribution system operating data. h. Include commissioning reports. i. Include copy of valve charts/schedules. j. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 23 00 00 Article titled "Demonstration". Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
N.
Record Drawings: 1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording As-constructed conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions. 2. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. 3. At completion of project, input changes to original project CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon substantial completion. 4. Bottom of pipe, duct and equipment elevations and dimensioned locations for all distribution systems (hydronic and air). Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for underground systems below grade to 5-feet outside building. 5. See Division 23 individual sections for additional items to include in record drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 A.
Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State, Federal and other applicable laws and regulations. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis-of-Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-of-Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA listed.
B.
C.
D.
E.
230000 - 5
5/23/2011
F.
ASME Compliance: ASME listed water heaters and boilers with an input of 200,000 BTUH and higher, hot water storage tanks which exceed 120 gallons, and hot water expansion tanks which are connected to ASME rated equipment or required by code or local jurisdiction. Provide safety controls required by National Boiler Code (ASME CSD 1) for boilers and water heaters with an input of 400,000 BTUH and higher. WARRANTY
G.
1.6 A.
Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01 and the General Conditions. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
B.
1.7 A.
Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, equipment, fire sprinklers, plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including ceiling suspension, and tile systems), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence. Advise Architect in event a conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to pumps, fans, valves, control devices, air handlers, vibration isolation devices, etc. MATERIALS A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL approved or have adequate approval or be acceptable by State, County, and City authorities. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
2.2
B. C.
230000 - 6
5/23/2011
D.
Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance as defined by EPA, including but not limited to arsenic, lead, asbestos, or volatile organic compound (VOC).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control operators, valves, motors and vibration isolation devices) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. Earthwork: a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork sections. Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling. b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: Firestopping: Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. Pipe Installation: 1. Coordinate work to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building, as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating for coordinating installation of piping systems. 2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy. SEISMIC CONTROL
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
230000 - 7
5/23/2011
A.
Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. General: 1. Seismic Design Category: D Soils. 2. Building Category: III. 3. Importance Factor (l-p): Equipment importance factor of 1.0. 4. Earthquake resistant designs for HVAC (Division 23) equipment and distribution, i.e. motors, ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority. 5. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority. 6. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed structural engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping, ductwork, equipment, and system appurtenances. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals. 7. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for system crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit shop drawings along with seismic bracing details. Coordinate exact design requirements with project Structural Engineer. Piping and Ductwork: Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" latest edition published by SMACNA or local requirements. Equipment: Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of equipment during earthquake. REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
B.
C.
D. 3.3 A.
Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 Sections. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation: 1. Underground system installation prior to backfilling. 2. Prior to covering walls. 3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation. 4. After major equipment is installed. 5. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ. 6. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
B.
3.4 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed. 2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared. Install new piping and ductwork, and wiring to point of connection. Where existing systems are being utilized, clean existing distribution systems (ductwork, piping, fans, air handlers) prior to connecting new ductwork or piping.
230000 - 8
5/23/2011
3.
4. 3.5 A.
Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.
CUTTING AND PATCHING Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s). 2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work. 3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout. 4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work. 5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt, and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation. 2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. 3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in service. DEMONSTRATION A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 Sections.
3.6
3.7
3.8
230000 - 9
5/23/2011
B.
Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations. CLEANING
C.
3.9 A. B.
Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work. INSTALLATION
3.10 A.
Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of HVAC systems. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment, piping and ductwork. DEMOLITION
B.
C.
D. 3.11 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 01 and Division 02. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. Scope: a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to the HVAC system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work. b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings. 2. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner. 3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused ductwork and piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.
230000 - 10
5/23/2011
4.
Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, fixtures, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).
3.12 A.
ACCEPTANCE Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 23 sections and the following: 1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following: a. Testing and Balancing Reports b. Cleaning c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals d. Training of Operating Personnel e. Record Drawings f. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates g. Start-up/Test Document h. Commissioning Reports FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 01, Section 23 00 00 and individual Division 23 sections. Tests: 1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Refer to individual Specification sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Operation & Maintenance Manuals. 2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide an electrician with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.
3.13
B.
3.14
END OF SECTION
230000 - 11
5/23/2011
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub-mains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 3. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below. 2. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section. 3. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. 4. Specify reports required because of editing procedures in Part 3 of this Section. 5. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 6. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms. 7. Test Instrument Calibration: Submit proof of calibration within the last 6 months. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Acceptable Balance Firm: a. General: Procure services of independent balance and testing agency, approved by Architect, which specializes in balancing and testing of plumbing, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust and test water circulating and air moving equipment and air distribution or exhaust systems. Minimum Experience: 5 years.
1.2
1.5
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 1
5/23/2011
b.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11.
12. 13. 14. 15.
Industry Standards: Testing and Balancing will conform to NEBB, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as follows: 1) NEBB: Comply with Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 2) ASHRAE: Comply with recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting and balancing. 3) ANSI: (a) S1.4 Specifications for sound level meters. (b) S1.11 Specifications for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band analog and digital filters. c. Test Observation: If requested, conduct tests in the presence of the Architect or the Architect's representative. Provide proof of testing agency having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope. Code Compliance: Perform tests in the presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Owner Witness: Perform tests in the presence of the Owners representative. Engineer Witness: The engineer or engineer's representative reserves the right to observe tests or selected tests to assure compliance with the specifications. Simultaneous Testing: Test observations by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), the Owner's representative and the engineer's representative need not occur simultaneously. Do not perform testing, adjusting, and balancing work until heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment has been completely installed and is operating continuously as required. Conduct air testing and balancing with clean filters in place. Clean strainers prior to performing hydronic testing and balancing. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. a. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: 1) Submittal distribution requirements. 2) Contract Documents examination report. 3) Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. 4) Work schedule and Project site access requirements. 5) Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 6) Coordination of documentation and communication flow. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: a. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. b. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
230593 - 2
5/23/2011
16.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 A.
WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. TAB Agency provides warranty for a period of 90 days following submission of completed report, during which time, Owner may request a recheck of up to 10 percent of total number of terminals, or resetting of any outlet, coil, or device listed in the final TAB report. 2. Guarantee: Meet the requirements of the following programs: a. Provide a guarantee on AABC or NEBB forms stating that the agency will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1) The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2) Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a persons skin than is normally dissipated. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. TAB: Testing and Balancing.
B.
1.7
B.
C.
D. E. F.
G. H.
I.
J.
230593 - 3
5/23/2011
K.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L.
M. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. N. O. P. Q. R. S. 1.8 A. Retain acronyms and abbreviations that remain after this Section has been edited for Project. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. COORDINATION Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
B. C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and controls, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
3.2
230593 - 4
5/23/2011
B.
Perform TAB work with doors, closed windows, and ceilings installed etc., to obtain simulated or project operating conditions. Do not proceed until systems scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. Where Owner occupies building during the testing period, cooperate with Owner to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. EXAMINATION
C.
3.3 A.
Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. Examine project record documents described in Division 01. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including Basis-of-Design, HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. Coordinate requirements in system and equipment with this Section. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. Examine system and equipment test reports. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
B. C. D.
E.
F. G.
H. I. J.
K. L.
230593 - 5
5/23/2011
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-airvolume terminals. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, equipment, drafts, and cold walls. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. Interlocked systems are operating. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. N. 3.4 A. B. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. PREPARATION Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows, doors and other portions of the building envelope can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Attendance is required by installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C.
D.
3.5
B.
230593 - 6
5/23/2011
C.
Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
3.6 A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design at coils and plus or minus 5 percent at system pumps and equipment. Adjust supply, return, and exhaust air quantities to maintain pressurization in spaces indicated on plans. Note and document room-to-room pressurization and maintain these relationships. Adjust pressure controlled spaces to within +/- 0.01 in W.C. RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
B.
C.
D.
3.7 A.
Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. Mark on drawings locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference location in final report. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner's Representative, or Commissioning Agent. PRE-CONSTRUCTION BALANCE (EXISTING SYSTEMS)
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.8 A.
Pre-Construction Balance - Air Systems 1. Prior to start of construction or demolition; read and record airflow to establish as-found conditions. Provide pitot traverse of supply, return and exhaust ductwork at locations indicated on drawings and, as minimum, at central air handlers, main branch ductwork and at each floor. 2. Read and record static pressure conditions across existing filters, coils and fans.
230593 - 7
5/23/2011
3.
Read and record amp draw and motor data from each existing air handler and fan that will be modified during project.
B. 3.9 A.
Report data and observations to Architect. FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES Prepare test reports for both fans and inlets and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. Verify that motor starters are equipped with thermal protection, sized for the connected load. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. Check for airflow blockages. Check that condensate drains are installed, trapped and primed and routed to drain. Check for readily observable leaks in air-handling unit components and ductwork. VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
B. C. D.
E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.10 A.
Compensating for Diversity: 1. When the total airflow of terminal units is more than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: a. After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1) Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2) Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure to deliver design airflow at the terminal unit. 3) Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow. 4) Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
230593 - 8
5/23/2011
3.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6) Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7) Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8) Record the final fan performance data. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: a. After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1) Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2) Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3) Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition. 4) Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5) Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6) Measure static pressure duct system at the sensor. 7) Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 8) Measure supply return and outside airflows with dampers at full economizer position.
5)
3.11 A. B. C. D. 3.12 A. B. C. 3.13 A.
PARALLEL FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES Set primary air valve maximum volume per variable air volume system procedures with heating fan off. Set minimum primary air per schedule. Adjust thermostat to operate heating fan. Set fan speed to lowest speed that delivers design heating flow. SERIES FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES Set primary air valve maximum volume per variable air volume system procedures. Adjust fan speed to deliver design maximum air flow at air outlets. Set primary airflow at minimum and verify that airflow at air outlets remains constant. TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
230593 - 9
5/23/2011
B.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. REPORTING
C. D. E. F.
G. H. I. J. 3.14 A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. FINAL REPORT
B.
3.15 A.
General: Computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page.
B.
C.
D.
230593 - 10
5/23/2011
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11. 12. 13. 14.
Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. Project name. Project location. Architect's name and address. Engineer's name and address. Contractor's name and address. Report date. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in SF. g. Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Design velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in PSIG (Pa). Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone.
F.
G.
230593 - 11
5/23/2011
2.
c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in SF. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).
H.
Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. ADDITIONAL TESTS
3.16 A.
Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during nearpeak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during nearpeak summer and winter conditions.
B.
END OF SECTION
230593 - 12
5/23/2011
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Type A, Flexible Fiberglass Blanket 2. Accessories 3. Duct Insulation Accessories 4. Duct Insulation Compounds RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. B. Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1% by weight PBDE in all insulating materials across the board. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Installer qualifications. 2. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any) for each type of product indicated. 3. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. 4. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 5. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: Installer to have minimum 5 years experience in the business of installing insulation. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.6
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 1
5/23/2011
1.7 A.
FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation construction as installed to be not more than a flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50 and smoke developed of 50 as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method. Test pipe insulation in accordance with the requirements of UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15."
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Type A, Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: 1. Certainteed 2. Johns Manville 3. Knauf 4. Owens-Corning 5. PPG 6. Or approved equivalent. TYPE A, FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS BLANKET A. B. ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2; flexible blanket. 'K' Value: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F installed, maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. Density: 0.75 lb./cu.ft. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire resistant Kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape or outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Insulation Jacketing: Presized glass cloth, not less than 7.8 ounces/sq.yd., except as otherwise indicated. Coat with gypsum based cement. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cement, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. General: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors, stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics, cements and tape to have the same flame and smoke component ratings as the insulation materials with which they are used. Shipping cartons to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed those listed above. Provide permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety. Provide nonwater soluble treatments. Provide UV protection recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.
2.2
C. D.
2.3
B.
C.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 2
5/23/2011
2.4 A.
DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES Staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS A. Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
2.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS Do not apply insulation until pressure testing of the ducts and piping has been completed. Do not apply to pipe with heat tracing until system has been tested. Do not apply insulation until the duct has been inspected. Examine areas and conditions under which duct insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. 3.3 A. B. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated. INSTALLATION Insulation: Continuous through walls, floors, partitions except where noted otherwise. Ductwork: 1. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations to completely cover duct. 2. Butt insulation joints firmly together and install jackets and tapes smoothly and securely. 3. Apply duct insulation continuously through sleeves and prepared openings, except as otherwise specified. Apply vapor barrier materials to form complete unbroken vapor seal over insulation. 4. Coat staples and seals with vapor barrier coating. 5. Cover breaks in jacket materials with patches of same material as vapor barrier. Extend patches not less than 2-inches beyond break or penetration on all directions and secure with adhesive and staples. Seal staples and joints with vapor barrier coating. 6. Fill jacket penetrations. i.e., hangers, thermometers and damper operating rods, and other voids in insulation with vapor barrier coating. Seal penetration with vapor barrier coating. Insulate Hangers and Supports for cold duct in un-conditioned spaces to extent to prevent condensation on surfaces. 7. Seal and flash insulation terminations and pin punctures with reinforced vapor barrier coating. 8. Continue insulation at fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers up to and including those portions of damper frame visible at outside of the rated fire barrier. Insulating terminations at fire dampers in accordance with this section. 9. Do not conceal duct access doors with insulation. Install insulation terminations at access door in accordance with this section.
B.
3.2
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 3
5/23/2011
10.
11.
Duct Liners: Mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure insulation to cleaned sheet metal duct with continuous (minimum 90) percent coat of adhesive. For widths over 20-inches, additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners 15-inches on center or per manufacturer requirements. Accurately cut liner and thoroughly coat ends with adhesive. Butt joints tightly. Top and bottom sections of insulation overlap sides. Factory/field coat exposed edges. Metal nosing for exposed lending edges and when velocity exceeds 3500 FPM or manufacturer rating on exposed edges. Keep duct liner clean and free from dust. At completion of project, vacuum duct liner if it is dirty or dusty. Cut studs off near washers. Do not use small pieces. If insulation is installed without horizontal, longitudinal, and end joints butted together, installation will be rejected and work removed and replaced with work that conforms to this Specification. Duct Wrap: Cover air ducts per insulation table except ducts internally lined. Wrap tightly with circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of 2-inches. Adhere insulation with 4-inch strips of insulating bending adhesive at 8-inches on center. On ducts over 24inches wide, additionally secure insulation with suitable mechanical fasteners at 18-inches on center. Circumferential and longitudinal joints stapled with flare staples 6-inches on center and covered with 3-inch wide, foil reinforced tape.
3.4 A.
PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT Installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other methods of attachment which would penetrate the vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape. Apply insulation to pipe and seal with self-sealing lap. Use self-sealing butt strips to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers of insulation and cover to match pipe or use performed PVC molded insulation covers. LABELING AND MARKING A. Provide labels, arrows and color on piping and ductwork. Attach labels and flow direction arrows to the jacketing per 23 05 23. DUCTWORK SURFACES TO BE INSULATED Item to be Insulated Supply ductwork where duct is not specified to be lined. Return ductwork where duct is not specified to be lined or where ductboard is not utilized. Supply ductwork (exposed to weather, in crawl space and in unheated attics) System Insulation Type Duct Size Insulation Thickness
3.5
B.
3.6
3.7
All
1-1/2-inch
All
1-1/2-inch
All
3-inch
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 4
5/23/2011
Return ductwork (exposed to weather, in crawl space and in unheated attics)
All
3-inch
A.
Note: Insulation thickness shown is a minimum. If state codes require additional thickness, then provide insulation thickness per code requirements. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
3.8 A.
Protect installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
END OF SECTION
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 230933 - ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Wiring RELATED SECTIONS Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. In addition, reference the following: Power wiring per Division 26. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Drawings: complete control diagram, including written description of control sequences. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Include record wiring drawings showing installed condition and operating changes made during start-up. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.6 A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as outlined in Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Within 30 days prior to warranty expiration date, control supplier to visit job site and check calibration, operation, and adjustment of temperature, pressure and humidity sensors, valves, dampers, thermostats and other devices installed by control supplier. Make repair or replacement of defective control equipment as required at no charge to Owner. 2. Submit letter to Architect certifying that this work has been completed. 3. Attach copy of service report signed by Owner's Representative.
1.5
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers as specified in specific articles below.
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
230933 - 1
5/23/2011
2.2 A. B.
WIRING In accordance with Division 26 and applicable codes. Study Mechanical and Electrical Project Drawings and Specifications and provide line and low voltage wiring relating to control system. Includes wiring of contactors, relays, circuits, and incidental power wiring: operation power for time clock, power when run through stat/timeclock/relay, transformers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. MOTOR RUN STATUS SWITCH Current Sensing Switches: 1. Route conductors through window of device as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where equipment load is greater than amp rating of current transformer of current sensing switch, provide 5-amp secondary rated current transformer to monitor load, routing secondary wires through current transformer of current sensing switch. Manufacturers: Veris Industries H6800 series. 3. Coordinate location of switch with Division 26 for switching of power to fire/smoke dampers. INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A. General: 1. Install thermostats in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room thermostats installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing. Actuators: 1. General: a. Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer's instructions. b. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. 2. Actuator Mounting for Damper and Valve arrangements to comply to the following: a. Damper Actuators: Do not install in the air stream b. Use a weather proof enclosure (clear and see through) if actuators are located outside. c. Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature not-to-exceed 122 degrees F through any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Provide appropriate air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation as necessary. Mount per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Actuator cords or conduit to incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible. Do not allow water to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point to be avoided to prevent water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator. Control Valve: 1. Valves installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Slip-stem control valves installed so that stem position is not more than 60 degrees from vertical up position. Ball type control valves installed with stem in horizontal position. 3. Control valves accessible and serviceable. 4. Install isolation valves so that control valve may be serviced without draining supply/return side piping system. Install unions at connections to screw-type control valves. 5. Valve Sizing for Water Coil: a. On/Off Control Valves: Line size.
3.2
B.
C.
230933 - 2
5/23/2011
b.
c.
Modulating Control Valve Body Size may be reduced at most two pipe sizes from the line size or not less than 1/2 the pipe size. BAS contractor to size all water coil control valves for the application as follows: 1) Booster-heat valves sized not-to-exceed 4-9PSI differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent Valve Authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop. 2) Primary valves sized not-to-exceed 5-15PSI differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent Valve Authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop. 3) Butterfly valves sized for modulating service at 60-70 degree rotation. Design velocity 12-feet per second or less when used with standard EPDM seats. Valve Mounting arrangements to comply to the following: 1) Provide unions on all ports of two-way and three-way valves. 2) Install three-way equal percentage Characterized Control valves in a mixing configuration with the A port piped to the coil. 3) Install 2-inch and above, Three-Way globe valves, as manufactured for mixing or diverting service to the coil.
D.
Air Flow Station: Install where indicated in ductwork with manufacturer's recommended straight ductwork upstream and downstream of air flow station or as shown on drawings, whichever is greater.
END OF SECTION
230933 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Rectangular Ductwork Fabrication 2. Insulated Flexible Duct 3. Single Wall Round (and Oval) Ductwork Fabrication RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Welding certificates. 2. Field quality control reports. 3. Record drawings in CAD. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.6 A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Duct design is generally diagrammatic and is not meant to be scaled. Major changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.2
1.5
1.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Transverse Joints:
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
233100 - 1
5/23/2011
1. 2. 3. 4. B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Nexus Inc. Ward Industries, Inc. Or approved equivalent.
Formed-On Flanges: 1. Ductmate Industries 2. Lockformer 3. Or approved equivalent. Insulated Flexible Duct: 1. J.P. Lamborn Co. 2. ATCO 3. Flexmaster 4. Or approved equivalent. RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK FABRICATION
C.
2.2 A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems not-to-exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Formed-On Flanges: construct according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, Figure 1-4, suing corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. a. Duct Size: Maximum 30-inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. b. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. 2. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19-inches and larger and 0.0359-inch thick or less, with more than 10 SF of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
B.
2.3 A. B.
General: Comply with OMSC latest edition, Class 1. Construction: Standard factory fabricated product. Inner wall: Impervious vinyl or chlorinated polyethylene, permanently bonded to a vinyl or zinc-coated spring steel helix. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket insulation covered by an outer wall of vinyl or fiberglass-reinforced metalized vapor barrier. Listing: UL 181 listed Class 1 flexible air duct material. Overall thermal transmission: No more than 0.25 BTU/in or hr/sq. deg. Fat 75F differential, per ASTM C335. Vapor transmission value no more than 0.10 perm, per ASTM E96 Pressure rating: 4-inch w.g. positive pressure and 1-inch w.g. negative pressure.
C.
D.
E. F.
233100 - 2
5/23/2011
G.
Performance Air friction correction factor: 1.3 maximum at 95 percent extension. Working air velocity: Minimum 2000 FPM. Flame spread rating: No more than 25. Smoke development rating: No more than 50 as tested per ASTM E84. Insertion loss: Minimum attenuation of 29 DB for 10-foot straight length at 8-inch diameter at 500 Hz.
H. I. J. 2.4
SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of material specified in this section according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Flat Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible. Fabricate ducts larger than 72-inches in diameter with buttwelded longitudinal seams. 1. Manufacturers: a. McGill AirFlow Corporation. b. SEMCO Incorporated. Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20-inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. 2. Ducts 21- to 72-inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket. 3. Ducts Larger than 72-inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, Figure 3-2. 4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances. a. Manufacturers: Lindab Inc. or approved equivalent. 5. 90-Degree Tees and laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts. 6. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. 7. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of dieformed, gored, and pleated elbows to be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: a. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and flexible, unless otherwise indicated. b. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa): 1) Ducts 3 to 36-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch . 2) Ducts 37 to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch. 3) Ducts 52 to 60-inches in Diameter5: 0.052-inch. 4) Ducts 62 to 84-inches in diameter: 0.064-inch. c. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg: 1) Ducts 3 to 26-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch.
B.
C.
D.
233100 - 3
5/23/2011
d.
e.
f.
g. h. i.
2) Ducts 27 to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch. 3) Ducts 52 to 60-inches in Diameter: 0.052-inch. 4) Ducts 62 to 84-inches in Diameter: 0.064-inch. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes. Round Elbows 8-inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or non-standard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows 9 through 14-inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows Larger than 14-inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8-inches in Diameter and Pressures 0.040-inch thick with 2-piece welded construction. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION General: The following pressure class(es) be used in design of ductwork specified in this section unless otherwise noted on drawings: PRESSURE IP 0.5-inch higher than air handlers discharge pressure (min. 4-inch pressure class). + 1 in 0.5-inch more negative than return/exhaust fan pressure or -2inch pressure class, whichever is more negative. 0.5-inch more negative than return/exhaust fan pressure or -2inch pressure class, whichever is more negative. 0.5-inch more negative than return/exhaust fan pressure or -2inch pressure class, whichever is more negative. -1 in CLASS METRIC 996.4 PA
SYSTEM Medium pressure supply (Fan to Terminal Unit (TU)) Low pressure supply (downstream of TU) Return main (>24-inch)
249 PA -498.2 PA
Return branch (<24-inch)
-249 PA
General exhaust
-498.2 PA
Lab low pressure exhaust (upstream of lab valve/TU)
-249 PA
B.
Duct Materials - Applied Locations 1. General: Following pressure class(es) used in design of ductwork specified in this section unless otherwise noted on the drawings: 2. Fabricate ductwork from materials as follows. a. Supply, Return and General Exhaust Air Ductwork and Plenums: Galvanized steel unless specified or noted otherwise.
233100 - 4
5/23/2011
b.
General Exhaust Branch Serving Ceiling Air Outlet in Shower Room or Toilet Room with Shower: Aluminum or T304 stainless steel.
C.
Ductwork Installation: 1. General: Install entire duct system in accordance with drawings, Specifications, and latest issues of local Mechanical Code, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. At Contractor's option, rectangular ductwork may be resized to maintain an equivalent air velocity and friction rate, while maintaining a maximum aspect ratio of 3. Remove markings and tagging from ductwork exterior surface in mechanical rooms and other locations where ductwork is exposed. 2. The duct layout shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature. Coordinate the ductwork routing and layout, and make alterations to the ductwork routing and layout as required to eliminate physical interferences. Where deviations in the ductwork routing as shown in the Contract Drawings are required, alterations may be made so as not to compromise the air flow, pressure drop, and sound characteristics of the duct fitting or duct run as shown on the Contract Drawings. In the event Architect determines that the installed ductwork is inconsistent with the above mentioned criteria, remove and replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12-feet (3.7 m) unless interrupted by fittings. 4. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. 5. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, shape, and for connections. 6. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12-inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. 7. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. 8. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. 9. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. allow for easy removal of ceiling tile. 10. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. 11. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, air duct accessories, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. 12. Electrical and IT Equipment Spaces: route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults, electrical equipment spaces, IDF/MPOE rooms, and enclosures. 13. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's Seismic Restraint manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, Mason seismic restraint and support systems, details to be provided with pre-approved OPA numbers. 14. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's Duct Cleanliness for New Construction. 15. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 -inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible duct material. 16. Install ductwork in the location and manner shown and detailed. Review deviations required by job conditions with Architect prior to any fabrication. Provide fittings for construction per SMACNA. 17. Fabricate radius elbows with centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 duct diameters. 18. Do not install duct size transition pitch angles which exceed 30 degrees for reductions in duct size in the direction of airflow, and 15 degrees for expansions in duct size in the direction of airflow. 19. Install fixed turning vanes in square throat rectangular elbows and in tees. 20. Fabricate duct turns with the inside (smallest) radius at least equal to the duct width (supply ducts) and 1.5x radius (return and exhaust ducts). Where necessary, square elbows may be used, with maximum available inside radius and with fixed turning vanes. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
D.
233100 - 5
5/23/2011
E.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and control devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities as well as Code required clearances. HANGING AND SUPPORTING
F.
3.2 A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24-inches of each elbow and within 48-inches of each branch intersection. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16-feet (5 m) and at each floor. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (prooftest) load. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4-inches thick. Provide aluminum supports for aluminum ductwork. Provide stainless steel supports for stainless steel ductwork. Floor supports in mechanical rooms to be elevated 1-inch above finish floor and void space filled with masonry grout. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. Hang rectangular sheet-metal ducts with a cross sectional area of less than 7 SF with galvanized strips of No. 16 USS gauge steel 1-inch wide, and larger ducts with steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hangers. Support at a maximum of 8-feet on center. Anchor ducts securely to building in such a manner as to prevent transmission of vibration to structure. Do not connect duct hanger straps to roof deck. Do not support ducts from other ducts, piping or equipment.
B. C.
D. E. F.
G. H. I.
J. K.
L.
M. Attach strap hangers installed flush with end of sheet-metal duct run to duct with sheet-metal screws. N. Construct exterior ductwork or ductwork which is otherwise exposed to weather watertight and slope 1/4-inch per foot to avoid standing water. Exposed ductwork hung in clean areas such as sanitary areas, pharmaceutical areas, wash down areas or food process areas to be installed using double end, food grade trapeze hanger rods suitable for use with food grade strut.
O.
233100 - 6
5/23/2011
3.3 A.
CLEANING Grille and Exposed Duct Cleaning: 1. After completion of ductwork installation, operate each fan system (excluding exhaust fans) for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to installation of ceiling grilles and diffusers. After grilles and diffusers are installed, clean out accumulation of particles from grilles and diffusers prior to acceptance. 2. Clean exterior surface of ducts exposed to public view of chalk, pencil and pen marks, labels, sizing tags, dirt, dust, etc. , so that upon completion of installation, ducts are left in clean and unblemished manufactured conditions. 3. Exposed duct and grilles to remain free of dust entrained streaks due to leakage at joints and grille connections during warranty period. Clean leaks, seal and refinish to match existing if visible streaks develop. FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Install flexible duct with bend radius equal to 1.5 times the diameter. Minimum length 2-feet. Maximum length 5-feet, unless noted otherwise. 1. Provide round neck grilles/diffusers or square-to-round transitions. Flex duct connections directly to square neck not allowed. 2. Flex duct allowed in concealed spaces above lay-in ceilings only. SPIN-IN FITTINGS AND FLANGED TAKE-OFFS A. B. Install at branch takeoffs to outlets using round or flex duct. Flanged take-offs secured with minimum 8-inch screw spacing (3 screws minimum). SOLID CORE FLEXIBLE DUCTS (INSULATED AND UNINSULATED) A. B. C. Install ducts to maintain round cross section. Connect to rigid ducts per manufacturer's recommendations. Replace dented portions with new duct. Field repairs not allowed. Install downstream of terminal VAV units, fan coils, VRF evaporators, and water source heat pumps only. Size ductwork at no more than 0.06-inch H20/100-feet of duct. Allowed in concealed spaces above lay-in ceilings only. Install strictly per manufacturer's installation directions. Install only in even duct sizes (8-inch, 10-inch, 12-inch, 14-inch).
3.4
3.5
3.6
D. E. F. G.
233100 - 7
5/23/2011
3.7 A.
MOUNTING FOR SIDEWALL GRILLES AND REGISTERS Mounting heights indicated on Drawings from finish floor to lower edge of grille or register. Exception: If mounting height is not shown on drawings, use "Down 6-inches". This indicates measurement from ceiling to top edge of grille or register. Install sidewall return air grilles for "sight-tight" visibility at eye level (position blades to obscure visibility from floor level).
B.
END OF SECTION
233100 - 8
5/23/2011
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Sheet Metal Materials 2. Dampers 3. Access Doors RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and fabrication/installation drawings for each factory fabricated duct accessory. Include leakage, pressure drop and maximum back pressure data. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate air duct accessories. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Provide instructions for each factory fabricated duct accessory. 4. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. a. See Section Division 01 Product Requirements, for additional provisions. b. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. 4. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.5
1.6
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 1
5/23/2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Dampers: 1. Ruskin 2. Air Balance 3. Cesco 4. Greenheck 5. Nailor 6. Or approved equivalent. Access Doors: 1. Ductmate 2. Cesco 3. Ruskin 4. Nailor 5. Or approved equivalent. Control Dampers: 1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck 3. CESCO 4. Air Balance 5. Nailor 6. Or approved equivalent. Turning Vanes: 1. Aerodyne 2. Ductmate Industries 3. Duro Dyne Corp 4. Metalaire Inc. 5. Ward Industries 6. Or approved equivalent. Flexible Connectors: 1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics Inc. 3. Ward Industries 4. Or approved equivalent. SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Galvanizing: 11/4 ounces per square foot total both sides; ducts to have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
B.
233300 - 2
5/23/2011
2.3 A. B.
DAMPERS Basis-of-Design: Ruskin MD35 (rectangular). General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Rectangular Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design with linkage concealed in frame and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 1. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel. 2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 10 gauge thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 3. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet. 4. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 16 gauge thick extruded aluminum. 5. Blade Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter, plated steel, hex shaped, mechanically attached to blade. 6. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 8. Mill galvanized. 9. Capacity: a. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 3-inches w.g. b. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 1,500-feet per minute across 24-inch by 24-inch damper. Round Volume Dampers: Single-blade suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Galvanized, roll formed, minimum of 20 gauge thick with beads at each end. 2. Blades: Minimum 20 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel, round, single-piece. 3. Aluminum Frames: Minimum 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet. 4. Aluminum Blades: Minimum 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: Minimum 16-gauge thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Minimum 3/8-inch square, plated steel, mechanically attached to blade. 7. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in hole in frame. 8. Finish: Mill galvanized. 9. Capacity: a. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 3-inches w.g. b. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 1,500-feet per minute. 10. Leakage: Maximum 40 cfm at 1-inch w.g. for 20-inches diameter damper. 11. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.02-inch w.g. at 1,500-feet per minute through 20-inch diameter dampers. Jackshaft: 1-inch diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multipledamper assembly.
C.
D.
E.
F.
233300 - 3
5/23/2011
2.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zincplated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include 2 elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
G.
Concealed Damper Hardware: For dampers above non-removable ceilings (gyp, plaster, decorative, etc.) where access panels have not been shown on Architectural drawings or in locations where dampers are more than 2-feet above the ceiling, provide: 1. Concealed Damper Regulator: Young Regulator Company Model 315 or approved equivalent. 2. Cable System: Young Regulator Company or approved equivalent. 3. Controller: Young Regulator Company 270-275 or approved equivalent. 4. Control wrenches, wire stops, casing nuts, and stainless steel wire. 5. Paint cover plate as directed by Architect. ACCESS DOORS
2.4 A.
Duct Pressure Class 2-inch WC and Greater: Sandwich-type design with threaded locking bolt assembly. Closed cell neoprene gasket permanently bonded to inside panel. Zinc-coated steel wing nuts or polypropylene molded knobs with threaded metal inserts - zinc coated bolts sealed to inner panel. Duct Pressure Class 1--inch WC and Less: Galvanized steel assembly incorporating frame, door, hinges, and latch(es). Frame tabbed for attachment to duct panel. Double wall door panel with 1-inch insulation. Open cell neoprene gasket attached to frame. Cam latches for tight closure. Plenum Doors: Extruded aluminum frames with extruded santoprene seals. Double-wall 20 gauge galvanized steel door panel with fiberglass insulation. Size: Maximum size available to fit rectangular duct panel dimension or round duct diameter. Plenum doors minimum 2-feet wide x 4-feet high.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. PREPARATION Verify that electric power is available and of correct characteristics. Coordinate smoke dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers with fire alarm system. Inspect areas to receive air duct accessories. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect the installation of the dampers. Do not proceed until conditions are corrected. Coordinate location in RCP and color of concealed damper hardware with Architects prior to installation. INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. Where installing volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D. 3.2
B.
C.
233300 - 4
5/23/2011
D.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from each branch takeoff. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and where required for air testing and balancing. Install all dampers square and free from racking with blade running horizontally. Do not compress or stretch damper frames into duct or opening. Handle dampers using sleeve or frame. Do not lift dampers using blades, actuators, or jack shafts. Install bracing for multiple sections to support assembly weights and hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. Turning Vanes: 1. Vanes must be installed, eliminating every other vane is not allowed. 2. Single thickness vanes cannot be over 36-inches long without intermediate vane runner. 3. Install per SMACNA and fasten/support to prevent vibration, noise, and to maintain proper alignment at design velocity Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers , turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. 5. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches by 5-inches. b. Two-Hand Access: 12-inches by 6-inches. c. Head and Hand Access: 18-inches by 10-inches. d. Head and Shoulders Access: 21-inches by 14-inches. e. Body Access: 25-inches by 14-inches. f. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25-inches by 17-inches. 6. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches in diameter. b. Two-Hand Access: 10-inches in diameter. c. Head and Hand Access: 12-inches in diameter. d. Head and Shoulders Access: 18-inches in diameter. e. Body Access: 24-inches in diameter. 7. Label access doors. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. ADJUSTING
E. F. G. H. I.
J.
K.
L. 3.3 A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
END OF SECTION
233300 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Grilles, Registers, Diffusers RELATED SECTIONS Contents of Division 23 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size and accessories furnished. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Air distribution Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule lists basis-of-design, with any specialty accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on schedule. Submitted air distribution must match criteria of basis-of-design: a. Construction materials and appearance. b. Frame/installation method. c. Isothermal throw plus or minus 5 percent at design flows shown on drawings. d. Noise Criteria: NC value plus or minus 1 at design flows shown on drawings. e. Accessories: Equal to Basis-of-Design. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5
1.6
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233700 - 1
5/23/2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers as specified in specific articles below. GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedule lists basis-of-design, with specialty accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on schedule. Submitted air distribution must match criteria of basis-ofdesign, including accessories and finish: 1. Matching construction materials and appearance. Equal installation method/frame. 2. Pressure drop equal to or less than basis-of-design at CFM on plans. 3. Throw: Isothermal jet throw plus or minus 5 percent of basis-of-design at CFM listed on plans. 4. Noise Criteria: Plus or minus 1 NC of basis-of-design at CFM listed on plans. If basis-of-design NC is below registered level, submitted must match. NC rating with 10 dB room factor or less. Provide 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-way deflection as indicated on plans. Register Dampers: Dampers utilized with grilles. Opposed blade dampers utilizing a side operated worm drive which provides external duct operation. Slot the end of the shaft to receive a screwdriver. Factory assembled side operator. Construct of the same material as the grille. Manufacturer same as grilles/diffuser. Coordinate mounting frames with ceiling construction type. Verify per reflected ceiling plans. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Environmental Air Products, Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price Co, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Seiho.
B. C.
D. E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide seismic supports, clips, and bracing per local code.Coordinate installation of framing. Provide complete coverage of rough openings by integral device flanges or auxiliary frames. Where above ceiling location is unconditioned space, caulk rough openings; repair and re-paint locations where dust entrainment streaks develop due to unsealed openings. Damp locations, such as lockers, restrooms, showers, natatoriums, whirlpool/spas, to have aluminum construction even if scheduled otherwise; mounting hardware to be stainless steel. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plan(s). Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. 18-inch straight duct section or acoustic plenum at connection. Provide square to round adapters where required for connection to round ducts. Provide integral balancing dampers for diffusers, and grilles and registers where duct manual balancing dampers are not shown or specified.
B.
C.
D.
E.
233700 - 2
5/23/2011
F.
Adjust discharge direction and spread per plans. Adjust throws of air outlets to eliminate drafts and to distribute air during heating and cooling operation. Exterior color of grilles per Architect. White finish if not otherwise scheduled or noted by Architect. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Ceiling membrane: Protect ceiling membrane per code. Fire caulk around openings. Provide listed radiation damper in rated roof/ceiling or floor/ceiling assemblies as required per code. Test, adjust, and balance VAV diffusers per manufacturer's specific instructions. LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
G.
H.
I. 3.2 A.
Coordinate connection plenum dimensions with linear slot final dimensions to conform with manufacturer's recommendations, or as indicated. Total and active lengths as noted on drawings. Blank off unused sections. Coordinate frame type with Architect. Paint surfaces visible behind air outlets and inlets, including blank-off sections, matte black unless otherwise called for on drawings. CLEANING
B.
3.3 A.
After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
233700 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 260000 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SECTION INCLUDES Work included in 26 00 00 applies to Division 26 work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electrical systems for proposed project. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work. Definitions: 1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. 3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished. 4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01 requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items. 5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance. RELATED SECTIONS: A. B. Contents of Section applies to Division 26 Contract Documents. Related Work: 1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to: a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. b. Drawings c. Addenda d. Owner/Architect Agreement e. Owner/Contractor Agreement f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 26 sections and those listed in this section. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from: 1. State of Oregon:
B.
C.
1.2
1.3
B.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260000 - 1
PSU MILLAR LIBRARY REMODEL 5/23/2011
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. C.
OAR Oregon Administrative Rules OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code OFC Oregon Fire Code OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code OPSC Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code OEESC Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code Oregon Elevator Specialty Code
General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from: 1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 2. ANSI American National Standards Institute 3. APWA American Public Works Association 4. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 5. ASHRAE Guideline, the Commissioning Process 6. ASTM ASTM International 7. CFR Code of Federal Regulations 8. CSA CSA International 9. EEMAC Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada 10. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 11. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 12. FCC Federal Communications Commission 13. FDA Food & Drug Administration 14. FM FM Global 15. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 16. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 17. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 18. ISO International Organization for Standardization 19. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design 20. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society 21. NEC National Electric Code 22. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 23. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 24. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 25. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 26. USDA United States Department of Agriculture See Division 26 individual sections for additional references. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence. SUBMITTALS
D. E.
F.
1.4 A.
See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as individual Division 26 Sections.
260000 - 2
B.
Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 26 sections. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings. 1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades. 2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Refer to individual Division 26 specification sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. 3. See Division 26 individual sections for additional submittal requirements. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of these additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-05 Chapter 13 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building Occupancy Category III, Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor of 1.0. 1. Special Seismic Certification to be provided for the following equipment and components that are part of the designated seismic system pursuant to Section 13.2.2, ASCE/SEI (Structural Engineers Institute). a. Emergency and standby power systems equipment including generators, turbines, fuel tanks, and automatic transfer switches. b. Switchgear. c. Motor Control Centers. d. Transformers. e. Electrical substations. f. UPS and associated batteries/racks. g. Distribution panels including electrical panelboards, control panels, including fire alarm, and auxiliary or remote power supplies. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 26 Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26 submittals. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design:
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
260000 - 3
1.
Basis-of-Design system components and controls for equipment are selected and sized based on the equipment specified as the first-named manufacturer, model number and supplemental additional options as indicated in the Contract Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.
J.
Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Refer to individual Division 26 specification sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. 1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections. Resubmission Requirements: 1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud changes in the submittals. a. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make "corrections as noted". b. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
K. L.
M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owners Instructions: 1. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) on CD/DVD of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project. b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment. c. Include Warranty per Division 00 and Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. d. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. e. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies. f. Include commissioning reports. g. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
260000 - 4
2.
3.
Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 26 00 00 Article titled "Demonstration". Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
N.
Record Drawings: 1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording As-constructed conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of conduit, and location of concealed electrical items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions. 2. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. 3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon substantial completion. 4. See Division 26 individual sections for additional items to include in record drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 A.
Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the basis-of-design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e. distribution equipment, duct banks, light fixtures, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-ofDesign, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA listed WARRANTY
B.
C.
D.
E. 1.6 A.
Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00 and Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01 and the General Conditions. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
B.
1.7 A.
Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, plumbing equipment/fixtures, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, cable tray and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including ceiling suspension and
260000 - 5
tile systems), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence. B. Advise Architect in event a conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict. Verify in field exact size, location, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
C.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Provide like items from one manufacturer. MATERIALS Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL approved or have adequate approval or be acceptable by state, county, and city authorities. Equipment/fixture supplier is responsible for obtaining State, County, and City acceptance on equipment/fixture not UL approved or not listed for installation. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance as defined by EPA, including but not limited to arsenic, lead, asbestos, or volatile organic compound (VOC).
B. C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., junction boxes, light fixtures, power supplies, motors, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block the intended usage. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
B.
C.
260000 - 6
clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines. D. Earthwork: 1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork sections. Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling. b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials. Firestopping: 1. Confirm requirements in Division 07. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. Plenums: 1. In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and conduit. SEISMIC CONTROL A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. General: 1. Seismic Design Category: D Soils. 2. Building Category: III. 3. Importance Factor (l-p): Equipment importance factor of 1.0. 4. Earthquake resistant designs for Electrical (Division 26) equipment and distribution, i.e. power distribution equipment, generators, UPS, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority. 5. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
E.
F.
G.
H. 3.2
B.
260000 - 7
6.
7.
Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for conduit and equipment. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for conduit crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit shop drawings along with seismic bracing details. Coordinate exact design requirements with project Structural Engineer.
C.
Equipment: 1. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of electrical equipment during earthquake. REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
3.3 A.
Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Notify Architect and Engineer, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation: 1. Underground conduit installation prior to backfilling. 2. Prior to covering walls. 3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation. 4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ. 5. Final Punch: a. Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
B.
3.4 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In the absence of specific requirements in Division 01, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: 1. During remodeling or addition to existing structure, while existing structure is occupied, present services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed. 2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared. Install new wiring, and wiring to point of connection. 3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off-peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum. a. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work. 4. No interruption of services to any part of existing facilities will be permitted without express permission in each instance from Owner. Requests for outages state specific dates and hours and maximum durations, with outages kept to these specific dates and hours and maximum durations. Obtain written permission from Owner for any interruption of power, lighting or signal circuits and systems. a. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption. b. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.5 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In the absence of specific requirements in Division 01, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: 1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval.
260000 - 8
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s). Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and/or walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.6 A.
EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: 1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt, and/or dust as a result of improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. 2. Protect equipment to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. 3. Protect bus duct and similar items until in service. DEMONSTRATION A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 26 08 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems and demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect, and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations. CLEANING A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections.
3.7
3.8
B.
C.
3.9
260000 - 9
B.
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work. INSTALLATION
3.10 A.
Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment. DEMOLITION
B.
C.
D. 3.11 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 01 and Division 2. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: 1. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to electrical system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work. 2. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. Owner will cooperate to best of their ability to assist in coordinated schedule, but will remain final authority as to time of work permitted. 3. Examination: a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. 1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work. 2) Verify location and number of electrical outlets, luminaires, panels, etc. in field. d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 1) Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings. 4. Execution: a. Remove existing luminaires, switches, receptacles, and other electrical equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings. b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain electrical continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate electrical boxes, conduit, wiring, equipment, and luminaires, as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work. c. Remove and restore wiring which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition. d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and wire to bypass inaccessible junction boxes and abandoned outlets.
260000 - 10
e.
f. g. h. i.
j. k. l. m. n. o. p.
If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing load. Extend circuiting and devices in existing walls to be furred out. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. Remove abandoned wiring to leave site clean. Existing lighting which is to remain, leave luminaires in proper working order. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
3.12 A.
ACCEPTANCE Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26 sections and the following: 1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following: a. Cleaning b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals c. Training of Operating Personnel d. Record Drawings e. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates f. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 01, Section 26 00 00 and individual Division 26 sections. Tests: 1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Refer to individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in operation and maintenance manuals. 2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide an electrician with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed. SALVAGED EQUIPMENT AND RECYCLED MATERIAL A. Salvage the following equipment not being reused and return to Owner: 1. Luminaires 2. Panelboards 3. Breakers
3.13
B.
3.14
260000 - 11
4. B.
Transformers
Electrical equipment that cannot be salvaged for reuse sell/give to recycling company. Recycle following excess, removed, or demolished electrical material: 1. Copper or aluminum conductors, buses, and motor/transformer windings. 2. Steel and aluminum from raceways, boxes, enclosures, and housings. 3. Acrylic and glass from luminaire lenses/refractors. Provide separate on-site storage space for recycled, recycled and salvaged, or salvaged material. Clearly label space as "__________ . Confirm additional salvaged equipment and recycled materials in the Contract Documents.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
260000 - 12
5/23/2011
SECTION 260501 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Materials and Equipment RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. EXAMINATION Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. Determine the exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate the Owner for damages caused by the failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
C. D.
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
260501 - 1
1. 2. E. F. G. 3.2 A.
Verify the accuracy of the information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish the work. Verify location and number of electrical outlets in the field.
Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions without exception. PREPARATION Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access, and access to different areas. The Owner will cooperate to the best of their ability to assist in a coordinated schedule, but will remain the final authority as to time of work permitted. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. Interruption of services (power, telephone, fire alarm, communication systems) to existing facilities: not permitted without express permission in each instance from the Owner. 1. Requests for service outages: state specific dates, hours and the maximum duration. 2. Written permission: obtain from Owner for interruption of power, lighting or signal circuits and systems. 3. Organize the work to minimize duration of service interruptions. 4. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
B. C.
D.
3.3 A. B. C.
Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Reroute wiring clear of demolition which serve existing outlets that remain and reconnect back to source. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
D.
E.
F. G. H.
260501 - 2
I.
Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. Furred out walls/columns: extend circuiting and outlets. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. CLEANING AND REPAIR
J. K.
3.4 A. B.
Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. Luminaires to remain: Remove luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps and broken electrical parts. SALVAGED EQUIPMENT AND RECYCLED MATERIAL
C.
3.5 A.
Salvage the following equipment not being reused and return to Owner: 1. Luminaires Salvage the following equipment not being reused and sell/give to electrical salvage company: 1. Luminaires Electrical equipment that cannot be salvaged for reuse sell/give to recycling company. Recycle the following excess, removed, or demolished electrical material: 1. Copper or aluminum conductors, buses, motor/transformer windings, and the like. 2. Steel and aluminum from raceways, boxes, enclosures, housings and the like. 3. Acrylic and glass from luminaire lenses/refractors. 4. Other Provide separate on-site storage space for recycled and salvaged material. __________
B.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
260501 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Wires and Cables 2. Connectors RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Cable insulation test reports in project closeout documentation. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.6 A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Wires and Cables: 1. Carol 2. General Cable 3. Okonite 4. Southwire 5. Or approved equivalent. Connectors: 1. Stranded conductors by Anderson. 2. Burndy 3. Ilsco 4. Thomas & Betts
B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
5. C.
Splices: 1. Branch Circuit Splices: a. Ideal b. Scotch-Lock c. 3M d. Or approved equivalent. 2. Feeder Splices: a. Compression barrel splice with two layers Scotch 23 and four layers of Scotch 33+ as vapor barrier. WIRES AND CABLES
2.2 A.
Copper, 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 12AWG and 10AWG, solid. Conductors 8AWG and larger, stranded. 12AWG minimum conductor size. Minimum insulation rating of 90 degrees C. Insulation Type: THWN-2 or XHHW-2. Phase color to be consistent at feeder terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front to back. Color Code Conductors as Follows: 208 VOLT WYE Black Red Blue White Green Green w/yellow trace 240 VOLT DELTA Black Orange (High Leg) Blue White Green N/A 480 VOLT Brown Orange Yellow Gray Green N/A
B. C.
PHASE A B C Neutral Ground Isolated Ground
2.3 A. B.
CONNECTORS Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor terminals. Lugs: Compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors; mechanical lugs for use with solid branch and feeder circuit conductors. Split bolt connectors not allowed. Conductor Branch Circuits: Wire nuts with integral spring connectors for conductors 12AWG through 8AWG. Push-in type connectors where conductors are not required to be twisted together are not acceptable. Manufacturers: 3M, Ideal, or approved equivalent. Fluorescent Luminaire Disconnect: polycarbonate housing, tin-plated brass contacts, insulated 18AWG, factory-installed solid copper leads, 105C temperature rating, UL94-V2 flammability, 4A, 600V. NEC Article 410 compliant. Finger-safe line side. Push-and-click connector. Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon, Lithonia or approved equivalent.
C. D.
E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
260519
A.
Wires and Cables: 1. Conductor Installation: a. Install conductors in raceways having adequate, code size cross-sectional area for wires indicated. b. Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation. c. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer during installation. d. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors and raceway entrances after conductor installation. Do not use pulling compounds for installation of conductors connected to GFCI circuit breakers or GFCI receptacles. e. Do not use aluminum wire to make connections to mechanical equipment. 2. Conductor Size and Quantity: a. Install no conductors smaller than 12AWG unless otherwise shown. b. Provide required conductors for a fully operable system. 3. Provide dedicated neutrals (one neutral conductor for each phase conductor) in the following single phase circuits: a. Multi-conductor branch circuits fed from single-pole overcurrent protective devices. b. Dimmer controlled circuits. c. Isolated ground circuits. d. Ground fault protected circuits where a GFCI breaker is used in a panelboard. e. Other electronic equipment which produces a high level of harmonic distortion including, but not limited to, computers, printers, plotters, copy machines, and fax machines. 4. Conductors in Cabinets: a. Cable and tree wires in panels and cabinets for power and control. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets. b. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards. c. Hold conductors away from sharp metal edges. 5. Exposed cable is not allowed.
END OF SECTION
260519
5/23/2011
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) 3. Conduit Fittings 4. Surface Raceway Systems Provide a complete system of conduit and fittings, with associated couplings, connectors, and fittings, as shown on drawings and described in these specifications. Basis-of-Design: Surface raceway design, shown on the drawings, is based on Wiremold product line. Approved manufacturers listed below are allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including area of fill, finish and coordination with other trades. Remove and replace raceway not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
B.
C.
1.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Allied Tube & Conduit 2. Beck Manufacturing WL 3. Picoma 4. Wheatland Tube Company 5. Or approved equivalent.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 1
B.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): 1. AFC Cable Systems Inc. 2. Electri-Flex Company 3. International Metal Hose 4. Or approved equivalent. Conduit Fittings: 1. See article below. Surface Raceway Systems: 1. See article below. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
C.
D.
2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. B. 2.4 A.
Description: UL 797, ANSI C80.3; steel galvanized tubing. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel, compression type. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) Description: UL 1, Interlocked steel construction. Fittings: NEMA FB 2.20. CONDUIT FITTINGS Bushings: 1. Insulated type for threaded rigid, IMC conduit or raceway connectors without factory installed plastic throat conductor protection: Thomas & Betts 1222 Series or O-Z Gedney B Series. 2. Insulated grounding type for threaded rigid, IMC conduit and conduit connectors: O-Z Gedney BLG Series. Raceway Connectors and EMT Couplings: 1. Steel connectors, couplings, and conduit bodies, with zinc electroplate. 2. Connector locknuts are steel, with threads meeting ASTM tolerances. Locknuts are zinc electroplated. 3. Connector throats (EMT, flexible conduit, metal clad cable and cordset connectors) have factory installed plastic inserts permanently installed. For normal cable or conductor exiting angles from raceway, the cable jacket or conductor insulation bears only on plastic throat insert. Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. EMT, O-Z Gedney Type TX. 2. RMC, O-Z Gedney Type AX, DX and AXDX, Crouse & Hinds XD. SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS
B.
C.
2.5 A.
Single Channel Surface Raceway: 1. Power: Provide 20 amp multi-outlet assembly as indicated on drawings. Wiremold 3000 Series. 2. Signal: Blank cover with outlets as indicated on drawings. Wiremold 3000 Series.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 2
B.
Two Channel Surface Raceway: One channel for power, other channel for signal. Provide 20 amp multioutlet assembly as indicated on drawings. Provide divider between channels. Wiremold 4000 Series. Provide lengths scaled from drawings to tolerance of 1/2-inch, over raceway length, between end wall surface. Do not scale from Division 26 drawings. Provide end caps, corner joints, tees, transition fittings, and the like, for complete installation. Verify exact mounting height with drawings. Finish Ivory, Gray, or Off White.
C.
D. E. F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Raceway system is defined as consisting of conduit, tubing, duct, and fittings including but not limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, bushings, expansion/deflection fittings, and other components and accessories. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the installation of conductors and cables. Finished Surfaces: Schedule raceway installation to avoid conflict with installed wall and ceiling surfaces. If unavoidable, coordinate work and repairs with Architect. CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: 1. Minimum Size: 1/2-inch for power and control, unless otherwise noted. 3/4-inch for communication/data, unless otherwise noted. 1/2-inch for signal systems, unless otherwise noted. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use EMT 2. Exposed: Use EMT Dry, Protected: EMT Elbow for Low Energy Signal Systems: Use long radius factory ells where linking sections of raceway for installation of signal cable. For Dry Areas: Motors, recessed luminaires and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration, use flexible metallic conduit. Motors and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration and subjected to any of following conditions; exterior location, moist or humid atmosphere, water spray, oil, or grease use PVC coated liquidtight flexible metallic conduit. EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B.
3.2
B.
C. D.
E.
F.
3.3
RACEWAYS
260533 - 3
B.
Plan locations of conduit runs in advance of the installation and coordinate with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas. Locate penetrations and holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as footings, beams, and walls. Penetrations are acceptable only when the following occurs: 1. Where shown on the structural drawings. 2. As approved by the Structural Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. INSTALLATION
C.
D. E.
3.4 A. B. C. D.
Install conduit securely, in neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Inserts, anchors and sleeves. 1. Coordinate location of inserts and anchor bolts for electrical systems prior to concrete pour. 2. Coordinate location of sleeves with consideration for other building systems prior to concrete pour. Conduit Supports: 1. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 2. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. 3. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. Provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. 4. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 5. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Flexible steel conduit length not-to-exceed 6-feet, 3-feet in concealed walls. Provide sufficient slack to reduce the effect of vibration. Install conduit seals at boundaries where ambient temperatures differ by 10 degrees F or more as shown on the drawings. Install seals on warm side of partition. Keep conduits a minimum of 12-inches away from steam or hot water radiant heating lines (at or above 104 degrees F) or 3-inches away from waste or water lines. Seal raceways stubbing up into electrical equipment. Plug raceways with conductors with duct-seal. Cap spare raceways and plug PVC raceway products with plastic plugs as made by Underground Products, or equal, shaped to fit snugly into the stubup. Seal raceways penetrating an exterior building wall to prevent moisture and vermin from entering into the electrical equipment.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 4
K.
Only conduit servicing elevator equipment can be installed through elevator shafts or equipment rooms. These conduits may only enter the room and go directly to the equipment being supplied. Keep 277/480 volt wiring independent of 120/208 volt wiring, and power wiring. Keep power wiring independent of communication system wiring. Keep emergency system wiring independent of other wiring systems.
L.
M. Keep life safety, critical branch and equipment systems wiring independent of other systems. N. Use suitable caps on spare and empty conduits to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Installation of conduit in structural concrete that is less than 3-inches thick is prohibited without the approval of the Structural Engineer. Maintenance pads, and curbs are exempted. Raceways Embedded in Floor Slabs: 1. Do not install raceways in slab without the approval of the Structural Engineer. 2. Do not let raceways interfere with placement of floor slab reinforcement components. 3. Install raceways between the upper and the lower layers of reinforcing steel. 4. Space raceways not less than 8-inches on centers except where they converge at panels or junction boxes. 5. Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and structural walls, to be installed not less than 12-inches from such supporting elements. 6. Branch circuit homeruns are not permitted in slab, route branch circuit homeruns above grade exposed in approved areas or above lay-in ceiling spaces. 7. Route conduits in or under slabs point-to-point. 8. Do not cross conduits in slab. 9. Encase medium voltage feeder conduits using red concrete. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and secure to boxes, panels, luminaires and equipment with fittings to maintain continuity. Provide watertight joints where embedded in concrete, below grade or in damp locations. Seal PVC conduit joints with solvent cement and metal conduit with metal thread primer. Rigid conduit connections to be threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal). Threadless connections are not permitted for RMC and IMC. Seal conduits where penetrating below raised floor area. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. Do not install conduits on surface of building exterior, across roof, on top of parapet walls, or across floors, unless otherwise noted on drawings. Exposed conduits are permitted only in following areas: 1. Mechanical rooms, electrical rooms or spaces where walls, ceilings and floors will not be covered with finished material. 2. Existing walls that are concrete or block construction. 3. Where specifically noted on Drawings. 4. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls, tight to finished surfaces and neatly offset into boxes. Do not install conduits or other electrical equipment in obvious passages, doorways, scuttles or crawl spaces which would impede or block area passage's intended usage. Install continuous conduit and raceways for electrical power wiring and signal systems wiring.
O.
P.
Q.
R. S.
T.
U.
V.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 5
W. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. X. Y. Z. Do not cross conduits in slab. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 6-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 120 degrees F.
AA. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. AB. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. AC. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. AD. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. AE. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. AF. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control, and expansion joints. AG. Conduit Terminations for Signal Systems: Provide a plastic bushing on the end of conduit used for signal system wiring. AH. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. AI. Flexible Conduit: Install 12-inch minimum slack loop on flexible metallic conduit and liquidtight flexible metallic conduit. AJ. Branch Circuits: Do not change intent of branch circuit or controls without approval. Homeruns for 20 amp branch circuits may be combined to maximum of six conductors in homerun. Apply derating factors. Increase conductor size as needed. AK. Feeders: Do not combine or change feeder runs. AL. Install conduits in above grade slabs located in middle of slab maximum size. Spacing and location of conduits in post-tension slabs is subject to approval by Structural Engineer. 3.5 A. CONDUIT FITTINGS Use set screw type fittings only in dry locations. When set screw fittings are utilized provide insulated continuous equipment ground conductor in conduit, from overcurrent protection device to outlet. Use compression fittings in dry locations, damp and rain-exposed locations. Maximum size permitted in damp locations and locations exposed to rain is 2-inches in diameter.
B.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 6
C.
Use PVC coated RMC 36-inch radius ells for power service conduits and 48-inch radius ells for telephone service conduits. Use insulated type bushings with ground provision at switchboards, panelboards, safety disconnect switches, junction boxes that have feeders 60 amperes and greater. Condulets and Conduit Bodies: 1. Do not use condulets and conduit bodies. Sleeves and Chases - Floor, Ceiling and Wall Penetrations: Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceilings or walls. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete with expansion-deflection fittings, equivalent to OZ/Gedney AXDX, installed per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Secure conduits 3-inches and larger to building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with an expansion-deflection fitting across joint, equivalent to OZ/Gedney AXDX, installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Provide conduits less than 3-inches where not cast in concrete with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of expansion joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits 3inch and larger may be installed. Seismic Joints: 1. No conduits cast in concrete allowed to cross seismic joint. 2. Provide conduits with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of seismic joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect that 15-inches is adequate for designed movement, and if not, increase this length as required. Provide rigid conduit coupling flush with surface of slab or wall for conduit stubbed in concrete slab or wall to serve electrical equipment or an outlet under table or to supply shop tool, etc. Provide plug where conduit is to be used in future. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.6 A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation and installer. SURFACE METAL RACEWAY SYSTEM
B.
3.7 A. B.
Install per manufacturer's installation instructions, perpendicular and parallel to building lines. Sleeves and Chases - Floor, Ceiling and Wall Penetrations: Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass though floors, ceiling or walls. Install raceways securely, in a neat manner with good workmanship, as specified in NECA 1.
C.
RACEWAYS
260533 - 7
D. E. F.
Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. Close end of wireway and unused conduit openings.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS
260533 - 8
5/23/2011
SECTION 260534 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Outlet Boxes 2. Floor Boxes and Poke-Thrus 3. Pull and Junction Boxes 4. Telecommunications Outlet Boxes Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and fittings for a complete installation. Include but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, bushings, locknuts and other necessary components. Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. Contents of Division 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
B.
C. 1.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Outlet Boxes: 1. Bowers 2. Hubbell 3. Raco 4. Steel City 5. Thomas & Betts 6. Or approved equivalent.
BOXES
260534 - 1
B.
Floor Boxes: 1. Wiremold/Walker 2. Hubbell 3. Steel City 4. Or approved equivalent. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. B-Line 2. Hoffman 3. Or approved equivalent. OUTLET BOXES
C.
2.2 A.
Luminaire Outlet: 4-inch octagonal box, 1-1/2-inches deep with 3/8-inch luminaire stud if required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4-inches square, minimum 1-1/2-inches deep. Single- or two-gang flush device raised covers. Telecom Outlet: Provide 4-inches square, minimum 2-1/8-inch deep box with two-gang plaster ring. Provide under provisions of Division 27. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install one-piece gang boxes with onepiece device cover. Install one device per gang. Masonry Boxes: Outlets in concrete. Construction: For interior locations, provide galvanized steel outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. FLOOR BOXES AND POKE-THRUS
B.
C.
D.
E. F.
G.
2.3 A.
Multi-Gang Box, Slab on Grade: Wiremold RFB4-CI series cast iron housing with S40CC series aluminum finish, steel flanged activation for use with matching carpet or tile insert. Rubber gasket protects interior from water and debris. Provide with two duplex receptacles and blank inserts for two future data outlets. Multi-Gang Box, Slab above Grade: Wiremold RFB4 series steel housing with S40CC series aluminum finish, steel flanged activation for use with matching carpet or tile insert. Rubber gasket protects interior from water and debris. Provide with two duplex receptacles and blank inserts for two future data outlets. Multi-Gang Box, Concrete Finish Floor: Same as above, except use Wiremold S40BB series aluminum finish, steel flanged activation. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
B.
C.
2.4
BOXES
260534 - 2
A.
Construction: Provide ANSI 49 gray enamel painted sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. Location: 1. Provide junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets from overhead. 2. Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate installation of conductors and limiting accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 270 degrees. TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLOET BOXES
B.
2.5 A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Minimum 4-inch by 4-inch by 2.5-inch-deep galvanized steel for use with single -gang plaster rings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. EXAMINATION Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. INSTALLATION Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. Secure boxes rigidly to substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. 1. Adjust box locations up to 10-feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. Mount center of outlet boxes, unless otherwise required by ADA, or noted on drawings, following distances above floor: 1. Control Switches: 46-inches. 2. Receptacles: 18-inches. 3. Telecom Outlets: 18-inches. Coordinate with Division 27. 4. Other Outlets: As indicated in other sections of specifications or as detailed on drawings. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6-inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. G.
H.
BOXES
260534 - 3
I.
Coordinate electrical device locations and elevations (switches and receptacles) with architectural drawings to prevent mounting devices in mirrors, back splashes, and behind cabinets. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
J. K. L.
M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inches separation. Provide minimum 24-inches separation in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12-inches of box. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
O.
P. Q. R. S. T.
U. V.
W. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. X. Y. Set floor boxes level. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. Box Color Coding and Marking: Refer to Division 26, Identification for Electrical Systems. ADJUSTING A. B. C. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
Z. 3.3
BOXES
260534 - 4
3.4 A. B. 3.5 A.
CLEANING Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION Provide 4-inch by 4-inch by 2.5-inch deep outlet boxes for mounting telecommunications outlets with single-gang plaster rings as required with 1-inch conduit to accessible ceiling space. Do not install outlet boxes back to back in walls. Provide minimum 6-inch separation, except provide minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. Support telecommunications outlet boxes independently of conduit. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use sectional outlet boxes. Install outlet boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlet boxes mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlet boxes in hollow stud wall.
B.
C. D. E.
F. G.
H.
END OF SECTION
BOXES
260534 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 260923 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of Materials, installation and testing of: 1. Occupancy Sensors (Ceiling and Wall mounted) 2. Combined Occupancy Sensor/Wall Switches ("Sensor/Switches") RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage wiring requirements. 2. Provide, on reproducible architectural floor plan, a layout of sensors indicating their sensing distribution. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Prepare and complete report of test procedures and results. Submit these test procedures and results to Owner and Architect. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.5
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Passive Infrared Sensors: 1. Watt Stopper 2. Leviton 3. Hubbell 4. Greengate
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
260923 - 1
5. B.
Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: 1. Watt Stopper 2. Or approved equivalent. Dual Technology Sensors: 1. Watt Stopper 2. Or approved equivalent. Basis-of-Design: Occupancy sensor layout on Drawings are designed based on Wattstopper product line. Approved manufacturers listed are allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including complete sensor coverage of the area controlled and switching of luminaires in the area controlled. Provide additional sensors and power switch packs as needed to provide the same level of functionality as shown on Drawings or required in Specifications. Remove and replace electrical equipment installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner. OCCUPANCY SENSORS (CEILING AND WALL MOUNTED)
C.
D.
2.2 A.
Passive Infrared Sensors: 1. Sensor Function: Detects human presence in floor area being controlled by detecting changes in Infrared energy. Sensor detects small movements, i.e., when people are writing while seated at a desk. 2. Provide temperature compensated dual element pyro-electric sensor and with multi element Fresnel lens. 3. Sensor utilizes DIP switches for adjustment to time delay and override. Field adjustable settings for sensitivity. 4. Provide daylight filter to ensure that sensor is insensitive to short-wavelength infrared waves, i.e., those emitted by sun. 5. adjustments and mounting hardware under removable cover to prevent tampering with adjustments and hardware. 6. Sensor utilizes advanced digital signal processing technology to reduce false offs without reducing sensitivity. 7. Ceiling-Mounted Sensor: a. 360 degree sensor range; coverage: 1200 SF, unless otherwise noted on drawings. b. Low Voltage Sensor: 24VDC power. Sensor operates remote power switch packs. Multiple sensors can be wired in parallel allow coverage of large areas. c. Provide internal form C dry contacts for HVAC control. d. Basis-of-Design: Watt Stopper CI-300 Series. 8. Wall-Mounted Sensor: a. 90 degree sensor range with dense wide angle lens; coverage: 1000 SF for desktop motion, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. b. Swivel mounting bracket for corner mounting to wall or ceiling. c. Low Voltage Sensor: 24VDC power. Sensor operates remote power switch packs. Multiple sensors can be wired in parallel allow coverage of large areas. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: 1. Sensor Function: Detects human presence in controlled floor area by detecting Doppler shifts in 40kHz ultrasound created by sensor. 2. Sensors are precision crystal controlled and do not interfere with each other when two or more are placed in same area. Sensor includes advanced digital signal processing to reduce false on signals without decreasing sensitivity, as well as immunity to RFI/EMI sources. 3. Depluggable terminal for plug-and-play replacement.
B.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
260923 - 2
4. 5. 6.
7.
Sensor utilizes DIP switches for adjustment to time delay and override. Field adjustable settings for sensitivity. Low Voltage Sensor: 24VDC power. Sensor operates remote power switch packs. Multiple sensors can be wired in parallel allow coverage of large areas. Ceiling-Mounted Sensor: a. Maximum protrusion of 1.1-inches and blend in aesthetically with ceiling. b. Coverage: 360 degree sensor range; coverage: 2,000 SF, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Ceiling Mounted Sensor - Hallway Sensor Coverage: a. Maximum protrusion of 1.5-inches and blend in aesthetically with ceiling. b. Coverage: 90 lineal feet.
C.
Dual Technology Sensors: 1. General: Sensor has combined capability of passive infrared and ultrasonic sensors as described above. 2. Function: Upon a person entering a space, motion must be sensed by both technologies before lighting will be turned on. After this has occurred, detection by either technology will hold lighting on. Sensors retrigger time delay where only one motion is necessary to turn on lights within 5 seconds after turning off. 3. Wall-Mounted Sensor: a. 90 degree sensor range with dense wide angle lens, coverage; 1000 SF for desktop motion, unless noted on drawings. b. Swivel mounting bracket for corner mounting to wall or ceiling. c. Low Voltage Sensor: 24VDC power. Sensor operates remote power switch packs. Multiple sensors can be wired in parallel allow coverage of large areas. 4. Ceiling-Mounted Sensor: a. 360 degree sensor range; coverage: 1000 SF for half-step motion, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. b. Low Voltage Sensor: 24VDC power. Sensor operates remote power switch packs. Multiple sensors can be wired in parallel allow coverage of large areas. 5. Basis-of-Design: Watt Stopper DT-300 Series. COMBINED OCCUPANCY SENSOR/WALL SWITCHES ("SENSOR/SWITCHES")
2.3 A.
Completely self-contained sensor system that fits into standard single gang box. Internal transformer power supply, latching dry contact relay switching mechanism compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating devices are not allowed. Passive infrared sensor technology includes advanced signal processing to reduce false triggers without increasing sensitivity. LED indicator blinks when occupant sensed. Rated to switch loads: 800 watts incandescent or 120-volt ballast; 1000 watts 277 volt ballast. Zerocrossing technology switches lighting off when AC voltage is at zero, minimizes contact wear. Provide adjustable daylight feature that holds lighting "off" when desired footcandle level is present. Provide integral off override switch with no leakage current to load or ground. Vandal-resistant lens. Finish: As selected by Architect.. Alerts for impending shut-off: light flash, audible, both or none.
B.
C.
D. E. F. G. H.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
260923 - 3
I.
Standard Sensor/Switch: 1. 180 degree sensor range; coverage: 150 SF for desktop activity. 2. Basis-of-Design: Watt Stopper PW-100 Series. Sensor/Slide Dimmer: 1. Line voltage slider dimmer allows for manual adjustment of lighting levels from 100 percent to 10 percent; compatible with two-wire line voltage 100 percent to 10 percent electronic dimming ballasts. Separate manual button for override 'off' control. 2. 180 degree sensor range; coverage: 150 SF for desktop activity. 3. Basis-of-Design: Watt Stopper WD Series.
J.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install occupancy sensors as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Provide connections to control circuits, occupancy sensors, power supply pack and low voltage wiring. Drawings were laid out using Watt Stopper sensors as Basis-of-Design. If another manufacturer is approved for installation under this Contract, verify with manufacturer representative that sensors are laid out to provide coverage across room space, adding additional sensors as needed. Provide power packs for sensor to control number of circuits and/or switch legs within its area of coverage. Field adjust each sensor to maximize its coverage of room space. Relocate sensors with ultrasonic technology to avoid being closer to HVAC diffusers and power packs than recommended by manufacturer. Field set time delay for each device as noted below: 1. Classrooms and Conference Rooms: 30 minutes. 2. Restrooms: 15 minutes. 3. Storage Rooms, Janitor's Closets, Unisex Restrooms: 5 minutes. 4. All Other Spaces: 15 minutes. Prior to applying dimming controls, maintain fluorescent lighting at full output for minimum of 100 hours. If this is not done, replace lamps and ballasts of affected luminaires at no cost to Owner. Parking Lot Lighting Controlled by Occupancy Sensor: Provide two occupancy sensors per pole for 360degree coverage at each pole. Mount sensors at 10 to 15-feet above grade (minimum 5-feet below pole lighting). Provide HID bi-level controller for each luminaire, mounting controller to adjoin luminaire and securing to pole arm. Provide liquid-tight, flexible metallic conduit and raintight junction box as needed to splice wiring between occupancy sensor and HID bi-level controller per manufacturer's installation instructions, and as allowed by luminaire manufacturer. Paint exposed conduit and junction box to match pole finish. LIGHTING SYSTEM TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. Test lighting controls to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide functional testing of sequences of operation to ensure operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
260923 - 4
complete report of test procedures and results to engineer and insert approved copy into project closeout documents. B. Testing includes: 1. Daylight automatic controls. 2. Occupant sensing automatic controls. 3. Automatic time and override controls for interior lighting. 4. Automatic time and photo controls for exterior lighting.
END OF SECTION
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
260923 - 5
5/23/2011
SECTION 260924 - DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Local Switched Photosensor RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards per Division 01, General Requirements and Section 26 00 00. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Provide, on reproducible architectural floor plan, layout of sensors indicating their sensing distribution. 2. Shop Drawings: Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage wiring requirements for occupancy sensors, and each daylighting control system shown on electrical drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Prior to adjusting and calibrating daylighting control system and local photocell field adjustable settings, contact local manufacturer representative and arrange for representative to visit site to educate both field installer and Owner representative on the operation of the controls. 2. Prior to applying continuous dimming daylighting controls, maintain fluorescent lighting at full output for minimum of 100 hours. If this is not done, replace lamps and ballasts of affected luminaires at no cost to Owner. 3. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of Owner. 4. Training: Provide minimum 4-hour training session to Owner representatives at a time approved by Owner after Owner has received approved operation and maintenance manuals. Training to include discussion of operation, adjustment, and replacement of sensors, photocells and control. 5. Prepare and complete report of test procedures and results. Submit these test procedures and results to Owner WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.5
1.6
DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS
260924 - 1
B.
In addition, provide: 1. Provide daylighting controls that carry a factory warranty for a minimum 5-year duration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Watt Stopper Greengate Or approved equivalent. LOCAL SWITCHED PHOTOSENSOR Low voltage, indoor photosensor to switch lighting using power pack; integrate with room occupancy sensors. 1. LCD display under removable cover to display four user-adjustable parameters: a. ON Setpoint. b. 1-850 footcandles. c. OFF Setpoint (25 percent to 100 percent above ON Setpoint). d. OFF Setpoint time delay (3 to 30 minutes). 2. Dimensions: 2.4-inches diameter by 0.7-inches deep. 3. White finish; surface mounted. Mountable in top-lit or side-lit position. 4. Voltage: 12/24VDC. LED status indicator. Basis-of-Design: Wattstopper LS-101 Series.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install photocells as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Complete connections to control circuits, photocells, control modules, power supply pack and low voltage wiring. Verify with manufacturer's representative that sensors and photocells are laid out in compliance to manufacturers published sensing distribution. Provide additional sensors for complete coverage of space being sensed. Photocell placement and wiring: 1. Drawings are schematic, and show photocell quantities together with the daylighting zones that they control. 2. Refer to manufacturer installation instructions for the recommended location and orientation of photocell with respect to exterior glazing and both interior and exterior lighting. 3. Reposition sensor at no additional cost to Owner to avoid conflict between sensor and object obscuring its view, and between sensor and both interior and exterior lighting that causes daylighting controls to repeatedly increase and decrease in brightness (i.e. "cycling"). 4. Field wire photocell for correct footcandle range (i.e. Watt Stopper LS-290C photocell has three jumper selectable footcandle ranges: 3 to 300 fc, 30 to 3000 fc, 60 to 6000 fc). LIGHTING SYSTEM TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
B.
C.
3.2
260924 - 2
A.
Test lighting controls to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide functional testing of sequences of operation to ensure operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide complete report of test procedures and results to engineer and insert approved copy into project closeout documents. Testing includes: 1. Daylight automatic controls. 2. Occupant sensing automatic controls. 3. Automatic time and override controls for interior lighting. 4. Automatic time and photo controls for exterior lighting.
B.
END OF SECTION
260924 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 262226 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Wall Switches 2. Receptacles 3. Finish Plates RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. WARRANTY Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers as specified in specific articles below. WALL SWITCHES Characteristics: Toggle type, quiet acting, 20 amp, 120/277 volt, UL listed for motor loads up to 80 percent of rated amperage, extra heavy duty. Leviton 1221, Pass & Seymour PS20AC1 or Hubbell HBL 1221. Pilot Light Switches: Lighted handle, toggle type, red unless noted otherwise, neon pilot lamp. Pilot lamp energized when load is energized. 20-amp/120, 208 and 277 volt. Leviton 1221-PL, Pass & Seymour PS20AC1CPL, Hubbell HBL 1221-PL.
B.
WIRING DEVICES
262226 - 1
C.
Lighted Handle Switches: Lighted handle, quiet acting, 20 amp, 120/277 volt, toggle type, red unless noted otherwise neon lamp. Lamp energized when load is not energized. Hubbell, Leviton, Cooper, Pass & Seymour or approved equivalent. Key Switches: 20 amp/120-277 volt, black key guide. Pass & Seymour PS20AC1-L, Hubbell HBL1221L, Leviton 1221-2L. Finish: Match Building Standard. Appearance: Provide lighting switches and receptacles of common manufacturer and appearance. RECEPTACLES
D.
E. F. 2.3 A. B.
Finish: Same exposed finish as switches. Duplex Receptacles Characteristics: Straight parallel blade, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding. 1. Commercial Grade: Riveted. Back and side wired. Brass ground contact on steel strap. Nylon face and nylon base. 20 amp. Cooper 5362, Hubbell 5362, Bryant 5352, Leviton 5362S, Pass & Seymour 5362. 15 amp. Cooper 5262, Hubbell 5262, Bryant 5252 or Leviton 525 Special Purpose Receptacles: Refer to Drawings for NEMA Standard Specification. FINISH PLATES
C. 2.4 A. B.
Finish Plates: Match building standard. Provide telephone/signal device plates; activated outlets to have coverplates to match modular jack.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PREPARATION Protections: 1. Devices: Upon installation of finish plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty receptacles or cord caps. 2. Finish Plates and Devices: Do not install items until finish painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices not acceptable. INSTALLATION A. See Architectural elevations for location and mounting height of wiring devices. Review Architectural elevations prior to rough-in and contact Architect immediately if conflicts are found between Architectural and Electrical plans. Do not rough-in devices until conflicts are resolved. Plumb: Install devices and finish plates plumb with building lines and equipment cabinets. Orientation: 1. Wall-Mounted Receptacles: Install with long dimension oriented vertically at centerline height shown on drawings or as specified.
3.2
B. C.
WIRING DEVICES
262226 - 2
2.
Vertical Alignment: When more than one outlet is shown on drawings in close proximity to each other, but at different elevations, align outlets on a common vertical center line for best appearance. Verify with Architect.
3.3 A.
LABELING Where switches control remote lighting or power outlets, or where switches or outlets in same (two or more serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc. or different areas, such as corridor and outside, plates with 1/8-inch black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet. Also label function light switches where two or more are mounted in same locations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Wiring Device Tests: Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test receptacles for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring.
3.4
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES
262226 - 3
5/23/2011
SECTION 262800 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Molded Case Circuit Breakers RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Contents of Division 26 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. SUBMITTALS Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Product data and time/current trip curves for circuit breakers supplied to project. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.2
1.5
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Circuit Breakers: 1. Eaton Electrical 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D 5. Or approved equivalent. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. 1-, 2- or 3-pole bolt-on, single handle common trip, 600VAC or 250VAC as indicated on Drawings.
2.2
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
262800 - 1
B.
Overcenter toggle-type mechanism, quick-make, quick-break action. Trip indication is by handle position. Calibrate for operation in 40C ambient temperature. 15 to 150 Amp Breakers: Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.
C. D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. COORDINATION Obtain and review the submitted product data for equipment furnished by the Owner, and furnished under other Divisions of this contract, particularly under Divisions 22 and 23. Confirm the equipment nameplate maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) and make accommodations and adjustments to overcurrent protective devices as necessary to coordinate with the nameplate rating. INSTALLATION A. Fuses: For each class and ampere rating of fuse installed, provide the following quantities of spares for quantity of fuses installed: 1. 0 to 24: Provide 6 spare. 2. 25 to 48: Provide 9 spare. 3. 49 and Above: Provide 12 spare. Provide testing of ground fault interrupting breakers. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide circuit breakers, as specified and on Drawings, for installation in panelboards, individual enclosures or combination motor starters. 2. Provide ground fault interrupter circuit breakers for equipment in damp or wet locations. 3. Provide device on handle to lock breaker in "ON" position for breakers feeding time switches, night lights and similar circuits required to be continuously energized.
B.
3.2
B. C.
END OF SECTION
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
262800 - 2
5/23/2011
SECTION 280001 - BASIC ELECTRONIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SECTION INCLUDES Work included in 28 00 01 applies to Division 28 work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electronic safety systems for proposed project. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work. Definitions: 1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. 3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installing, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished. 4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01 requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items. 5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance. RELATED SECTIONS: A. B. Contents of Section applies to Division 28 Contract Documents. Related Work: 1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to: a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. b. Drawings c. Addenda d. Owner/Architect Agreement e. Owner/Contractor Agreement f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits Contents of Division 26 apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 28 sections and those listed in this section.
B.
C.
1.2
C. 1.3
BASIC ELECTRONIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
280001 - 1
5/23/2011
B.
Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Document, of/from: 1. State of Oregon: a. OAR Oregon Administrative Rules b. OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code c. OFC Oregon Fire Code d. OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code e. OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code f. Oregon Elevator Specialty Code General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from: 1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 2. ANSI American National Standards Institute 3. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 4. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 5. ASHRAE Guideline, the Commissioning Process 6. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 7. ASTM ASTM International 8. CFR Code of Federal Regulations 9. CSA CSA International 10. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 11. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories 12. FM FM Global 13. ISO International Organization for Standardization 14. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design 15. NEC National Electric Code 16. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 17. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 18. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 19. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 20. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 21. USDA United States Department of Agriculture See Division 28 individual sections for additional references. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence. SUBMITTALS
C.
D. E.
F.
G.
1.4 A.
See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.
280001 - 2
5/23/2011
B.
Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 28 sections. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what difference, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings. 1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades. 2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Refer to individual Division 28 specification sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. 3. See Division 28 individual sections for additional submittal requirements. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-05 Chapter 13 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building Occupancy Category III, Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor of 1.0. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 28 Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 28 submittals. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design: 1. Basis-of-Design systems, components and controls for equipment are selected and sized based on the equipment specified as the first-named manufacturer, model number and supplemental additional options as indicated in the Contract Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation. 2. Where manufacturer equipment or model numbers are indicated with no exceptions, substitutions will be rejected.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
280001 - 3
5/23/2011
J.
Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Refer to individual Division 28 specification sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. 1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections. Resubmission Requirements: 1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required by Architect/Engineer review comments. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud changes in the submittals. a. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or "make corrections noted." b. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
K. L.
M. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owners Instructions: 1. Refer to individual Division 28 Specification Sections for additional requirements for operations and maintenance manuals. 2. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) on CD/DVD of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project. b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment. c. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies. d. Include Warranty per Division 00, Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual sections. e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include commissioning reports. h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. i. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Arrange for additional reviews; Bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. 3. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 28 00 01 Article titled "Demonstration". 4. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings. N. Record Drawings: 1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording As-constructed conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements and location of concealed items. Include items changed by addenda, field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions. 2. Record Drawings are to include equipment locations, calculations, and schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.
280001 - 4
5/23/2011
3.
4. 1.5 A.
At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon substantial completion. See Division 28 individual sections for additional items to include in record drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials to conform with all local, State, Federal and other applicable laws and regulations. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis-of-Design manufacturers equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (e.g. cable tray, panels, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-of-Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA Listed WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00 and Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 sections. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01 and the General Conditions. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, plumbing equipment/fixtures, fire sprinklers, plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including ceiling suspension and tile systems), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence. Advise Architect in event a conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict. Verify in field exact size, location, and clearances of existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
B.
C.
D.
E. 1.6
B.
1.7
B.
C.
D.
280001 - 5
5/23/2011
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to panels, devices and equipment unless otherwise specified in individual Division 28 sections. MATERIALS A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, or FM approved or have adequate approval or be acceptable by state, county, and city authorities. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance as defined by EPA, including but not limited to arsenic, lead, asbestos, or volatile organic compound (VOC).
2.2
B. C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 sections. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., devices, equipment, electrical boxes, panels, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. Earthwork: a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions. Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling. b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.
B.
C.
D.
280001 - 6
5/23/2011
E.
Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: Firestopping: Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around conduit, raceway and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. SEISMIC CONTROL
F.
3.2 A.
Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 sections. General: 1. Seismic Design Category: D Soils. 2. Building Category: III. 3. Importance Factor (l-p): All equipment importance factor of 1.0. 4. Earthquake resistant designs for electronic safety systems (Division 28) equipment and distribution, i.e. equipment, etc. conform to regulations of Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 5. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
B.
3.3 A.
Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 Sections. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation: 1. Underground conduit and wire installation prior to backfilling. 2. Prior to covering walls when electronic safety systems installation is started. 3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation. 4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ. 5. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
B.
3.4 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements in Division 01, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed. 2. Prior to changing over to new system, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared. Install new wiring to point of connection.
280001 - 7
5/23/2011
3.
4. 3.5 A.
Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.
CUTTING AND PATCHING Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s). 2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work. 3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout. 4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, repair, refinish and leave in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work. 5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with the individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. 2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation. 3. Protect devices, panels and similar items until in service. 4. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation. DEMONSTRATION A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00 and Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 sections.
3.6
3.7
3.8
280001 - 8
5/23/2011
B.
Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Staff as specified in Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 sections. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified factory certified instructor at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations. CLEANING
C.
3.9 A.
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work. INSTALLATION
3.10 A.
Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Division 01, Section 28 00 01 and individual Division 28 Sections. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to building structure. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment, conduit and wiring. DEMOLITION
B.
C.
D. 3.11 A.
Confirm requirements in Division 01 and Division 02. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. Scope: a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to electronic safety system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work. b. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings. c. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access, access to different areas. Owner will cooperate to best of their ability to assist in coordinated schedule, but will remain final authority as to time of work permitted. d. Examination: 1) Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. 2) Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
280001 - 9
5/23/2011
3)
e. f.
g.
Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. (a) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work. (b) Verify location and number of electronic safety system devices, panels, etc. in field. 4) Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. Promptly notify Owner if systems are found which are not shown on Drawings. Execution: 1) Remove existing electronic safety equipment, devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings. 2) Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain electrical continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate electrical boxes, conduit, wiring and equipment as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work. 3) Remove and restore wiring which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition. 4) If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and wire to bypass abandoned outlets. 5) If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing load. 6) Extend circuiting and devices in existing walls to be furred out. 7) Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 8) Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 9) Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 10) Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 11) Existing electronic safety system components are indicated on demolition plans. Verify exact location and number of existing devices and components in field. Only partial existing systems shown. Locations of items shown on Drawings as existing are partially based on Record and other Drawings which may contain errors. Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish intent of Contract Documents. 12) Remove abandoned wiring to leave site clean. 13) If existing electrical equipment contains PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyl), replace with new non-PCB equipment. Dispose of material containing PCBs as required by federal and local regulations. 14) Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. 15) Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service outside areas of remodel. 1) Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. 2) Notify local fire service. 3) Make notifications at least 7 working days in advance. 4) Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
280001 - 10
5/23/2011
3.12 A.
ACCEPTANCE Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following: a. Cleaning b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals c. Training of Operating Personnel d. Record Drawings e. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates f. Start-up/test Documents and Commissioning Reports FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirm requirements in Division 00 and Division 01. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28 sections and the following: 1. Tests: a. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Refer to individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Closeout Documents. b. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide a technician with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.
3.13
END OF SECTION
280001 - 11
5/23/2011
SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: 1. Addressable Initiating and Control Devices 2. Notification Appliances 3. Miscellaneous In addition, provide design for the following as required in these Contract Documents: 1. Fire Alarm System 2. Transmitter Communication System In addition, remove existing fire alarm system in remodel areas. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 A. B. Contents of Division 28 and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this section. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS References and Standards as required by Division 28 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, adopted edition. 2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, adopted edition. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submittals as required by Division 28 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, provide: 1. Shop drawings and calculations, to include the following: a. Identification of system designer and evidence of qualification or certification of designer as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). b. System designer NICET certification number. c. Floor plans indicating walls, doors, partitions, room descriptions, device/component locations. d. Ceiling height and ceiling construction details. e. A symbol legend with device catalog number, description, back box size and mounting requirements. f. Detailed riser diagram. g. Device addresses and notification appliance circuit numbers. h. Battery calculations for each battery backed fire alarm control unit. i. Point to point wiring indicating the quantity and gauge of the conductors and size of conduit/raceway used. j. Wiring connection diagrams for control equipment, annunciators, power supplies, chargers, initiating devices, notification appliances, components being connected to the system and interfaces to associated equipment.
B.
C. 1.2
1.4
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
283100 - 1
5/23/2011
k.
2.
3.
Voltage drop calculations for each notification appliance circuit, indicating individual appliance current draw, conductor run length and size. Utilize UL maximum current draw values for notification appliances and limit circuit loading to 10 percent voltage drop maximum. Provide a minimum of 20 percent spare current capacity per circuit. l. Complete sequence of operation. Prior to final acceptance, submit a letter confirming that inspections have been completed and system is installed and functioning in accordance with Specifications. Include manufacturer representative's certification of installation and letter of warranty. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Provide manuals containing the following: a. Catalog cut sheets. b. System components, initiating devices and notification appliances' installation sheets. c. Manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance manual. d. Program data file printout. e. Program data file on electronic storage media. f. Record drawings. g. Record drawings on electronic storage media. h. One year warranty agreement including parts and labor. Warranty period begins upon date of completion. i. Record of completion. j. Test reports.
1.5 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance as required by Division 28 and Division 01, General Requirements. In addition, meet the following: 1. Contact AHJ prior to bid and provide required fire alarm and detection devices and components as required by adopted codes as interpreted by AHJ. 2. City of Portland requirements, ordinances and amendments. WARRANTY A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Division 28 and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. MANUFACTURERS Furnish fire alarm control equipment specified in this Section by one manufacturer: Silent Knight. Notification Appliance Circuit Panels: Match existing. Addressable Initiating and Control Devices: 1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment. Notification Appliances: Notification appliances must be compatible with control equipment and notification appliance circuit panels. Match existing. Substitutions: . 1. For other acceptable manufacturers of control units specified, submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with Contract Documents.
D.
E.
283100 - 2
5/23/2011
2.
For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed, submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with contract documents.
F. 2.2 A.
Equipment to be supplied by a certified manufacturer representative. COMPONENTS General: Provide flush mounted units where installed in finished areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted units are acceptable, unless otherwise noted. Fire Alarm Control Unit: 1. Modify and extend existing to accommodate remodel. 2. Power Supply: Provide power supply(s), adequate to serve control panel modules, remote annunciators, addressable devices, notification appliances, and other connected devices. 3. Power Requirements: Loss of normal and emergency power automatically causes system to transfer to battery power. Indicate battery power operation by yellow lamp and audible annunciation at control panel and remote annunciator panels. Upon return of 120VAC power, unit recharges batteries to full capacity and maintains battery on float charge. Provide trickle charge adequate capacity to maintain battery fully charged with automatic rate charge. Provide batteries in locking cabinet manufactured for purpose. 4. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each function in this portion of the Specifications and for equipment interconnections required under electrical and mechanical specifications. 5. Auxiliary Switches: Provide auxiliary equipment control switches with labeled status indicating lights for each switch. 6. Addressing: Provide each initiating device with its own discrete analog address. Transmitters: Verify requirements and provide modification to existing call sequence and message as directed by Owner and the AHJ. Annunciators: Provide modification to existing framed floor plan of facility adjacent to the annunciator panel identifying room names/numbers, device/addresses or fire zone number and description as utilized on the annunciator panel, as required by local AHJ. Check with the local fire department for size and approved mounting location. Addressable Initiating and Control Devices: 1. Manual Pull Stations: Semi-flush single action, red finish. Stations do not allow closure without keyed reset. 2. Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors: Rated 135 degrees F or 190 degrees F as required by space use. Provide off white low profile detectors. 3. Rate-of-Rise and Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors: Responding to 15 degrees F temperature rise per minute and to 135 degrees F fixed temperature as required by space use. Provide off white low profile detectors. 4. Photoelectric Type Analog Detectors: Analog/addressable, panel adjustable sensitivity, LED source, multiple cell, 360 degree smoke entry, visual latching operation indicator, insect screen, functional test switch, two-wire operation, vandal resistant locking feature. 5. Duct-Mounted Analog Smoke Detectors: Analog/addressable photoelectric type, auxiliary relay contacts rated at 5 amps each at 120VAC. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, visual indication of detector actuation, direct housing mount. Detector powered from control panel, power on indicator light. Detector rated for air velocity, humidity, and temperature of duct and environment where installed. 6. Addressable Relay Module: Signaling line circuit interface module that connects to other building systems for control of fire/life safety functions, e.g., air-handler shutdown, fire/smoke damper closure, elevator recall. Module powered from control panel.
B.
C.
D.
E.
283100 - 3
5/23/2011
7. 8.
Addressable Control Module: Signaling line circuit interface module that provides notification appliance circuits or system control outputs. Module powered from control panel. Addressable Monitor Module: Signaling line circuit interface module that provides initiating device circuits for connection to contact closure initiating devices. Module powered from control panel.
F.
Notification Appliances: 1. Combination Horn/Strobe: Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount. Insect-proof. Provide horn/strobes that meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971. Candela rating as required by NFPA 72. 2. Strobe: Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount. Insect-proof. Provide strobes that meets latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971. Candela rating as required by NFPA 72. 3. Weatherproof/surface backboxes: Provide manufacturer's weather proof backbox listed for use with notification appliance in areas where the device is subject to humidity in excess of listed rating. Provide manufacturer surface backboxes where devices cannot be installed recessed Miscellaneous: 1. Protective Guard: Steel wire guard . 2. Protective Cover: Polycarbonate construction. 3. Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; color code and label. Type FPL, FPLR and FPLP as required by NEC. Minimum signaling line circuit and initiating device circuit wire size: AWG18. Minimum notification appliance circuit wire size: AWG14, or as approved by Engineer. Fiber optic cable as required by manufacturer. 4. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. a. Equipment Connected to Alternating Current Circuits: Maximum let through voltage of 350 V(ac), line-to-neutral, and 350 V(ac), line-to-line; do not use fuses. 5. Batteries: Sealed lead acid type. Provide additional cabinet, if required due to space limitations in control panels. 6. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. a. Provide same standard lock and key for each key operated switch and lockable panel and cabinet; provide 5 keys of each type b. Provide a different standard lock and key for each key operated alarm initiating device; provide 25 keys of each type.
G.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. DESIGN CRITERIA These are bidder design systems. Contact Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to bid to verify system's requirements. Design systems in compliance with code as interpreted by the AHJ. Provide design of the following systems as required by code. 1. Fire alarm system modifications. 2. Transmitter communication system modifications. System Operation 1. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Match Existing. 2. Supervisory Sequence of Operation: Match Existing. 3. Trouble Sequence of Operation: Match Existing. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B.
B.
C.
D.
283100 - 4
5/23/2011
2. 3. E.
Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): Class B, Style 4 Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B.
Spare Capacity: 1. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. 2. Signaling Line Circuit: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity. Power Sources: 1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary: Storage batteries. 3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate fire alarm system under normal supervisory condition for 24 hours and operate alarm signals for 5 minutes at end of standby period. INSTALLATION
F.
3.2 A.
Obtain approval of system design from AHJ prior to installation. Do not begin installation without approval from AHJ and submittal review comments from Engineer. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the Contract Documents. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, provide wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete system as described in these specifications, as shown on Drawings, and as required by AHJ. Provide wiring to meet the requirements of national, state and local electrical codes. Provide color coded wiring as recommended and specified by the fire alarm and detection system manufacturer. Conceal wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. Provide raceway system for cabling concealed in walls and hard ceilings and in locations where cabling is exposed. Where cabling cannot be concealed, provide surface raceway in finished areas and surface mounted EMT in nonfinished areas. Provide Type FPLR cable when in a riser application or FPLP cable when installed in plenums. Provide cabling and conduits system suitable for wet locations for below grade systems. At junction boxes and termination points, provide identification tags on wires and cables. Route wiring to avoid blocking access to equipment requiring service, access, or adjustment. Provide machine printed address label on addressable devices visible from the floor without magnification. Obtain Owner's 's approval of locations of devices, before installation. Install instruction cards in or adjacent to control panel.
B. C.
D.
E. F.
G. H. I. J.
K. L.
M. Provide control panel and remote power supplies with 120VAC dedicated circuit per NFPA requirements.
283100 - 5
5/23/2011
N.
Do not install cabinets or equipment below the battery cabinet. Do not locate battery and charging system cabinets in ceiling space. Provide wire guards or protective covers where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ. Perform system programming at the fire alarm control panel. Program the system without shutting the system down. Programming is done off line. Update and maintain hard copy and CD-ROM copy of program at the site. Room name labeling: Control unit schedules, programming, and labeling for electrical equipment, to use the room names and room numbers that the Owner adopts at the date of substantial completion of construction. This work is to be done at no added cost to the Owner. FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES
O. P.
Q.
3.3 A.
Provide conduit, wiring, boxes and terminations from fire alarm system to monitored components. 1. Alarm inputs: Provide connection in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following systems and components. a. Fire sprinkler water flow switches. b. Fire sprinkler dry-pipe alarm pressure switches. c. Fire sprinkler preaction system alarm condition. d. Kitchen hood fire suppression activation. e. Special hazard fire suppression system alarm condition. f. Other alarm inputs. 2. Supervisory inputs: Provide connection in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following systems and components: a. Fire sprinkler water control valve tamper switches. b. Fire sprinkler dry-pipe system low air pressure switches. c. Fire sprinkler preaction system supervisory condition. d. Special hazard fire suppression system supervisory condition. e. Other supervisory inputs. 3. Trouble inputs: Provide connection in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following systems and components: a. Fire sprinkler preaction system trouble condition. b. Special hazard fire suppression system trouble condition. c. Other trouble inputs. Fire Safety Functions: 1. Division 26 provides power and control conduit, wiring, boxes and terminations to power devices and interface to fire alarm system. a. Doors: 1) Provide smoke detectors and addressable control relays to release magnetic hold open devices and roll-down fire doors and door locks. Verify requirements and quantities prior to bidding. 2) Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door. 3) Electronic Locks or Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Unlock smoke zone egress doors upon activation of any alarm initiating device or suppression system in smoke zone. 4) Overhead Coiling Fire Doors: Release upon activation of smoke detectors on either side of door. b. HVAC Systems: 1) Fire/Smoke Dampers and Smoke Dampers:
B.
283100 - 6
5/23/2011
c. 3.4 A. B.
Verify requirements, locations and quantities with Division 23 prior to bidding. Provide required smoke detectors, relays, wiring, and the like. Connect control and power wiring to dampers per manufacturer's instructions. Verify quantities, location and requirements of dampers with Division 23 Drawings and Specifications, and mechanical system installer. (e) Provide control wiring, transformers and power connections for an operable damper and detection system. 2) Air moving systems: (a) Provide duct-mounted smoke detectors on air systems with air quantities of 2000 cfm or more. Coordinate with Division 23. (b) Install duct-mounted smoke detector(s) on return side of air duct. (c) Provide control wiring from addressable relay contacts to air handling equipment controller. Connect to controller so that when duct-mounted smoke detector is activated, the air handling equipment is shut down. (d) Provide duct-mounted smoke detectors rated for air velocity, temperature, and humidity of duct. Verify quantities, locations, and requirements with Division 23 Drawings and mechanical system installer. (e) Where duct-mounted smoke detectors are mounted in inaccessible building void spaces provide access hatch. Provide access hatch with fire rating equivalent to rating of wall, ceiling, or shaft being penetrated. Chute interlocks and controls:
(a) (b) (c) (d)
EXISTING COMPONENTS Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain fully operational outside areas of work. On-Premises Supervising Station: Include, as part of this work, modifications necessary to existing supervising station to accommodate new fire alarm work. INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. B. System testing and commissioning to be performed by a certified manufacturer representative. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. Document audibility and intelligibility measurements for each space on record drawings. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. Provide tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. Prepare for testing by ensuring that work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required to test system. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
3.5
C. D.
E. F.
G.
H.
283100 - 7
5/23/2011
I.
Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. 1. Record all system operations and malfunctions. 2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. 3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties. 4. At end of successful diagnostic period, complete and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form." CLOSEOUT
J.
3.6 A.
Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ); notify AHJ in time to schedule demonstration. 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and: 1. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed. 2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered. 4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 5. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Occupancy permit has been granted.
B.
END OF SECTION
283100 - 8
05/23/2011
Portland State University OITNetwork & Telecommunications Services TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING/WIRING INSTALLATION & RELATED FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS (July 2009)
Introduction The Office of Information Technology/ Network and Telecommunications Services (OIT/NTS) is responsible for providing voice and data services for Portland State University. Every effort is being made to keep the rates of the services as low as possible while still providing service and maintenance in a timely manner. OIT/NTS is constantly evaluating emerging technologies and equipment so that we can continue to offer the most reliable, up-to-date, and cost effective services. It is essential to design the telecommunications systems to meet present and future voice and data communication needs. Horizontal and vertical cabling/wiring and the pathways and communication rooms should be considered an integral part of the building infrastructure and therefore capable of future growth as new technology and customer needs change. Telecommunications systems include vertical and horizontal copper and fiber optic cabling/wiring as well as the associated termination hardware on both ends. The system includes pathways and conduit; equipment racks; frames; wire management systems; communication rooms; and the electrical, mechanical, and environmental equipment or systems required to support them. These specifications are intended to allow OIT/NTS to meet the telecommunications requirements of the University over the lifetime of the buildings. It is essential that OIT/NTS shall be consulted prior to and throughout the planning and design process to ensure that present and future voice and data service requirements can be met. The standards herein apply to the technologies in use at the time of the latest update to this document. The implementation of newer technologies shall require adherence to the standards written at the time of that implementation. General Industry Standards Construction specifications are a main ingredient of an Information Technology system. Information Technology systems shall adhere to these specifications in order to be functional in a wide variety of communications applications. This document does not allow or condone the avoidance of following any of the Laws, Standards, or Procedure of any, but not limited to the following: Related Documents Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in the latest editions of applicable publications, standards rulings and determinations of: ANSI American National Standards Institute TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industry Alliance FCC Federal Communications Commission BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Method Manual NEC National Electrical Code APPENDIX A - 1 National Electrical Code (NEC) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Uniformed Fire Code (UFC) State of Oregon Low Voltage Laws Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
05/23/2011
NFPA-70 National Fire Protection Association ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA/EIA-568-B-2.1, Transmission performance specification for 4 pair 100 Ohm Category 6 cabling. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Commercial Building Standards for the Telecommunications Infrastructure and Spaces ANSI/TIA/EIA- 607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 Telecommunications System Bulletin Technical Systems Bulletin, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems
GENERAL WIRING INSTALLATION STANDARDS: Based on the standards, practices and procedures listed above, the wiring of new buildings and major remodels of existing buildings shall use outlets, jacks, terminal blocks and horizontal wiring that are Category 6 compliant. For all PSU voice and data communications installations, PSU uses an open architecture design. Communications outlets at workstation and other jack locations shall minimally consist of four gang wall plates equipped with four 8-pin modular (RJ-45) jacks. The preferred standard for communications outlets in new construction is four gang wall plates equipped with four 8-pin modular (RJ-45) jacks. PSU has standardized on AMP/TYCO SL type workstation components; these components may be substituted with equivalent product only with prior approval of OIT/NTS. Horizontal station wire shall extend from communications outlets to associated terminal closets and shall be terminated on Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs). All terminated station wiring shall be properly labeled at the outlet faceplate and the IDF. Terminal closet material standards include the following: 7 x 19 Chatsworth racking system including wire management and tray, AMP/TYCO Category 6 patch panels & Corning fiber optic connectivity housings and panels. AMP/TYCO patch panels may be substituted with equivalent produce only with prior approval of OIT/NTS. The riser system shall consist of multi-mode & single-mode fiber and Category 3 copper riser cable. The recommended fiber cable is multi-mode, graded-index optical fiber with a nominal 62.5/125 micron core/cladding diameter and single-mode fiber. The copper riser shall be solid copper, 24 AWG, twistedpair Category 3 backbone cable. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as plenum or non-plenum wire, and all cabling and wiring installation shall comply with appropriate code for plenum or non-plenum requirements. Certification A BICSI-certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) shall design, engineer and sign off on all projects and he or she shall provide oversight during the project. All technicians performing horizontal and riser cabling or wiring work must be certified or otherwise qualified in the installation of Category 6 wire, jacks, patch panels and terminal blocks. While contractors may choose to use less qualified personnel or workers who are not Category 6 certified for wire pulling or rough in work, all wire termination work must be performed by technicians who are certified Category 6 installers and testers. Contractors may be asked to provide documentation or similar evidence that technicians are qualified Category 6 installers and are current with ANSI/EIA/TIA standards. Failure to provide such evidence or documentation could result in the disqualification of the contractor and termination of the work order, service order, or installation agreement or contract.
APPENDIX A - 2
05/23/2011
The above standards describe the general cabling and wiring guidelines to be adhered to by all contractors performing telecommunications cabling and wiring work at PSU. Any exceptions to these standards will be duly noted in the specific Scope of Work for each project. Any deviation from these standards that is not specifically allowed by OIT/NTS or otherwise delineated in the Scope of Work could be grounds for disqualification of Contractor and termination of the installation agreement/contract. QUALITY CONTROL & ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: Testing and Documentation Contractor shall test all cabling and wiring installed with an approved Category 6 tester performing a link test to at least 250 MHz following TSB-95 to support a minimum of 1000Mbs Ethernet. Contractors shall test all installed fiber strands for cable integrity using a bi-directional Power Meter with a controlled light source at a wavelength of 850nm & 1300nm for multimode and 1310nm & 1550nm for single mode. Contractor shall record all test results. Any installations that fail the testing shall be corrected and retested. All recorded results and related testing documentation, including those showing test failures, shall be provided to OIT/NTS on disk. OIT/NTS reserves the right to randomly test the Category 6 throughput at various installation locations to ensure the accuracy and completeness of contractor testing. Should any of these tests fail, OIT/NTS may withhold all, or some portion, of the payment due Contractor for wiring installation work. Housekeeping and General Clean-up Contractor shall ensure that all work areas are left in a clean, safe condition at the end of each workday or shift as well as at the end or completion of the entire project. Contractor is responsible only for that work they perform and resulting cleanliness or safety issues. Prior existing conditions are the responsibility of PSU. Qualifications, Professionalism and Behavior of Contractor Employees All technicians and other contractor employees performing work on PSU premises shall be highly qualified, skilled professionals who behave in a professional and courteous manner at all times. Contractor employees must have the ability to plan and organize their work efficiently and communicate effectively with OIT/NTS staff and other customer contacts in the field. OIT/NTS places a strong emphasis on good customer service and fully expects all of its contractors and vendors to endorse this service ethic when deploying technicians and other employees on the PSU campus. All contractor technicians and employees shall wear appropriate work attire on the job and shall present themselves in a professional manner in terms of attire and overall appearance. At least one technician or employee per work group shall wear attire that includes the contractor or vendor logo, business name, etc. Warranty Contractor must guarantee installation work, must warranty the fiber materials, if provided by the Contractor, and is required to describe the nature of Contractors guarantee in the Bid Response or Quote submitted for this solicitation. The warranty shall cover manufacturing defects in material, if provided by the Contractor, and workmanship under normal and proper use, application assurance, and the installation of all materials. The minimum warranty period for the installation of horizontal station wiring work shall be 5 years if PSU provides the materials and a minimum of ten years for labor and material if the Contractor provides the materials. Fiber installation warranty shall be a minimum of 5 years if PSU provides the fiber materials and 10 years for labor and materials if Contractor provides the materials.
APPENDIX A - 3
05/23/2011
Protection of Existing Equipment All existing and active networking and telecommunications hardware installed in PSU campus buildings shall be protected prior to the start of any construction. It shall be Contractors responsibility to effectively protect the owners network and telecommunications facilities, equipment, and materials from dust, dirt and any other damage during construction. Contractor shall take no action that will interfere with, or interrupt, existing building network and telecommunications services unless previous arrangements have been made with OIT/NTS or the appropriate building owners representative. If any shutdown of network or telecommunications services or systems is required for Contractor to perform work, Owners personnel will perform shutdown of affected systems. Contractor must provide Owner with a minimum of three (3) days advance notice for such system shutdowns. Should Contractor cause PSU network or telecommunications services or systems to be interrupted in any way, Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs associated with satisfactorily restoring or replacing services or systems to include all labor and materials required to restore or replace services or systems. All service or system restoration or replacement by Contractor must be approved by NTS. COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES REQUIREMENTS: Main Switchroom/Satellite Switchrooms for Telephone and Data Networking Equipment The main telephone equipment switchroom typically houses the telephone switch (PBX) cabinets; equipment racks for data networking equipment; UPS equipment; the wall field for cross-connecting the equipment cables, riser cables, intracampus BET cables, and ILEC/CLEC entrance cables; a work station; and storage space for maintenance spares, tools and test equipment. At PSU, there are typically two types of switchrooms: 1) the main switchroom which houses the central PBX cabinetry that serves the entire campus; and 2) satellite switchrooms for remote PBX cabinets that are connected via leased or PSU owned outside plant facilities back to the main campus switchroom. Since the main switchroom for the campus is in place and rather permanent in nature, this facilities requirement addresses satellite switchrooms which typically are required for new off campus buildings or similar major facilities construction projects where its more efficient and effective to install remote PBX cabinets versus extending additional cable plant facilities to serve extensions directly off the main PBX. The minimum size requirement for a satellite switchroom is 10 x 15. Minimum clear height in the room shall be 8 feet without obstructions. The access door to the room shall be at least 36 inches wide and 80 inches high, with doorsill, and shall be fitted with a lock. A minimum of two walls should be covered with rigidly fixed (3/4 trade size) A-C plywood preferably void free, 8ft. high, capable of supporting attached equipment. Plywood should be either fire rated or covered with two coats of fire retardant paint. A separate power supply circuit serving the switchroom shall be provided and terminated in its own electrical panel. Power supply (including lights) in the switchroom shall be on emergency power. Power shall be sufficient to support the equipment load and supporting facilities for the switchroom. A 1- tradesize conduit shall be provided from the switchroom to the building grounding electrode. The preferred location for the switchroom is the first floor (or ground floor) or a basement or sub-basement. It is desirable to locate the switchroom close to the main backbone network and building outside telephone company cable entrance site for ease of connectivity to these network and distribution facilities. When selecting the room site, avoid locations that are restricted by building components that limit expansion such as elevators, core, outside walls or other fixed building walls. Ease of accessibility to the space is important for the delivery of large equipment. The switchroom shall be located away from sources of electromagnetic interference at a distance that will reduce the interference to 3.0 V/m throughout the electromagnetic frequency spectrum. Special attention shall be given to electrical power supply transformers; motors and generators; x-ray equipment; radio, cell phone or radar transmitters; and induction sealing devices. The switchroom shall be located with ready access to the main HVAC delivery system to ensure sufficient airflow and cooling.
APPENDIX A - 4
05/23/2011
HVAC shall be provided on a 24 hours a day, 365 days-per-year basis. The temperature and humidity shall be controlled to provide continuous operating ranges of 64 F to 72 F with 30% to 55% relative humidity. The ambient temperature and humidity shall be measured at a distance of 5 feet above the floor level, after the equipment is in operation, at any point along the equipment aisle. A positive pressure differential with respect to surrounding area should be provided. The switchroom shall be provided with the proper fire suppression system. Appropriate portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and maintained within the switchroom. They should be located as close as practicable to the switchroom entry or exit. Additionally, some form of temperature alarm system should be installed to provide an early warning to a remote monitoring site of temperatures exceeding 75 F. The interior finishes of the switchroom shall be light in color to enhance room lighting. The floors, walls and ceiling shall be sealed to reduce dust. Flooring materials having antistatic properties shall be used. Lighting shall be a minimum of 540 lx (50 candles) measured 3 feet above the finished floor in the middle of equipment aisles between cabinets. One or more switches located near the entrance door to the room shall control the lighting. Lighting fixtures shall not be powered from the same electrical distribution panel as the telecommunications equipment in the room. Emergency lighting and signs should be properly placed in the room where absence of light would hamper emergency exit. Terminal Closets for Telephone and Data Networking Equipment There shall be at least one terminal closet per floor. Additional closets should be provided when the floor area exceeds 10,000 sq. ft. or the horizontal distribution distance to the workstation exceeds 90 meter (300 ft). There are typically two size scenarios for terminal closets: 1) the ideal situation where there is ample space to provide a minimum closet size of 10 ft. by 8 ft. with a single door at least 30 inches wide and 80 inches tall, opening out; and 2) the limited space scenario where the closet size should be a minimum of 7 ft. wide and 30 inches deep, both of which are inside dimensions, provided the closet is accessed via double doors which swing out away from the closet. In either scenario, the closet should be at least 8 feet high. Each closet shall have sufficient power and lighting. PSUs minimum power requirements are two dedicated 20 amp duplex power outlet per closet. Power supply (including lights) in the closet shall be on emergency power. Additionally, each closet shall have adequate airflow to ensure that operating temperatures do not drop below 50 F or exceed 80 F. Closets shall be centrally located on each floor, or located so that horizontal station wires runs to user work stations and phones do not exceed 200 feet. The preferred standard for station wire is 150 feet. Each closet shall have sufficient sleeves, slots, conduits, or similar floor penetrations necessary to allow for ease of installation of telecommunications cabling and wiring. Such penetrations shall be properly fire stopped per the applicable building codes. A minimum of two walls should be covered with rigidly fixed (3/4 trade size) A-C plywood preferably void free, 8ft. high, capable of supporting attached equipment. Plywood should be either fire rated or covered with two coats of fire retardant paint. Horizontal Pathways Horizontal pathways and spaces consist of structure that conceal, protect and support horizontal cables between the workstation outlet and the telecommunications terminal closet. When designing a building, the layout and capacity of the horizontal distribution systems must be thoroughly documented in the floor plans and other building specifications. Every ceiling distribution system must provide proper support for cables from the telecommunications terminal closet to the work areas it serves. Ceiling panels, support channels (T-bars), and vertical supports are NOT proper supports. Ceiling conduits, raceways, cable trays, and cabling must be suspended from or attached to the structural ceiling or walls with hardware or other installation aids specifically designed to support their weight. The pathways must have adequate support to withstand pulling the cables and be installed with at least 3 inches of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels (T-bar) to ensure accessibility. TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS APPENDIX A - 5
05/23/2011
Conduit Conduit types include electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit, and rigid PVC. Conduits shall be of the type permitted under the appropriate electrical codes. Metal flex conduit is not recommended due to cable abrasion problems and is not covered in this standard. Fish tape or pull cord/string shall be installed in all conduits. Any single conduit run extending from a telecommunications terminal closet shall not serve more than three communications outlets. Conduit shall be sized per Table 1.1 and be incrementally increased in size from the furthest outlet toward the telecommunications closet. No section of conduit shall be longer than 30 m (100 ft) or contain more than two 90 bends between pull boxes. A third bend may be acceptable in a pull section without derating the conduits capacity if the run is not longer than 10 m (33 ft) or the conduit size is increased to the next trade size.
TABLE 1.1 CONDUIT INTERNAL TRADE DIAMETER SIZE Mm (in) (.31) (.37) 15.8 20.9 26.6 35.1 40.9 52.5 62.7 77.9 0.62 0.82 1.05 1.38 1.61 2.07 2.47 3.07 1 1 1 2 2 3 NUMBER OF CABLES WIRE O.D. mm (in) 6.1 7.4 7.9 9.4 (.18) (.22)
3.3 (.53) 1 6 8 16 20 30 45 70
4.6 (.13) (.62) 1 5 8 14 18 26 40 60
5.6
13.5 (.24)
15.8 (.29)
0 4 7 12 16 22 36 50
0 3 6 10 15 20 30 40
0 2 3 6 7 14 17 20
0 2 3 4 6 12 14 20
0 1 2 3 4 7 12 17
0 0 1 1 2 4 6 7
0 0 0 1 1 3 3 6
Pull Boxes Pull boxes shall be used for the following purposes:
a) Fishing the conduit run. b) Pulling the cable to the box and then looping the cable to be pulled into the next length of
conduit. Pull boxes shall be placed in an exposed manner and location, and readily accessible. Pull boxes shall not be placed in a fixed, false ceiling space unless immediately above a suitably marked, hinged panel. A pull box shall be placed in a conduit run where: 1) the length is over 30 mm (100 ft); 2) there are more than two 90 bends; or, 3) if there is a reverse bend in the run. Boxes shall be placed in a straight section of conduit and not used in lieu of a bend. The corresponding conduit ends should be aligned with each other.
APPENDIX A - 6
05/23/2011
Surface Raceway Surface raceway, consisting of base, cover, couplings, elbows, and similar fittings, mounts directly on wall surfaces at appropriate work levels to provide a continuous perimeter pathway. Telecommunications outlets are located in cover fittings along the raceway. The electrical contractor shall provide faceplates for the surface raceway. The practical capacity for telecommunications wiring in perimeter raceways ranges from 30% to 60% fill depending on cable-bend radius. The pathway size shall be calculated as follows: the
PSU OITNetwork & Telecommunications Svcs. Cabling/Wiring Installation & Related Facilities Construction Standards Page 9 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES REQUIREMENTS: (contd.) summation of the cross-sectional area of all cables divided by the percent (expressed as a decimal fraction) of fill. Grounding and Bonding Grounding shall meet the requirements of the NEC and additionally grounding bonding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. When applicable, horizontal cabling and connecting hardware must be grounded and bonded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 requirements and practices. When grounding telecommunications cabling, ensure that the installation conforms with proper practices and codes (ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, ANSI/NFPA 70, and local building codes). An approved ground is available at the telecommunications terminal closet for: - Cross-connect frames. - Patch panel racks. - Active telecommunications equipment. - Test apparatus used for maintenance and testing.
ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT THESE STANDARDS SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO DAN WALSH, PSU TELECOMMUNICATIONS OPERATIONS & SERVICES MGR. AT 503/725-3310.
APPENDIX A - 7

Project Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Project Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1623 342 305

moc.lrahnotelrac 90279 nogero

2522 342 305 ht8 wn 223

ER]ITCETINCRA TRAH NOTELRAC

20.64012 # boJ AHC

1102 ,32 yaM

ytisrevinU etatS dnaltroP

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 105200 FIRE ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 102220 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

OREGON UNIVERSITY SYSTEM STANDARD PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT CONTRACT BID FORM

OUS CAMPUS: PROJECT: BID CLOSING: BID OPENING:

ADDENDA numbered ____ through____, inclusive (fill in blanks)

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances.

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Allowance No. 1: Signage 1. Amount: $7,500

END OF SECTION 012400

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

REQUESTS FOR CLARIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION 013100 - 4

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PORTLAND STATE UNIVERSITY

Project Site Construction Manager:

Office FAX: Site Phone: Site FAX: Pager:

Contractors Emergency & Weekend Phone: 1. 2. 3.

SU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PORTLAND STATE UNIVERSITY

CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SAFETY FORM INSTRUCTIONS

SU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

Other air contaminates? Y or N If yes, describe: ___________________________________ CONTRACTOR STAGING 013100.02 - 2

SU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PSU MILLAR LIBRARY LGIT REMODEL

PORTLAND STATE UNIVERSITY

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

ADDENDA numbered through, inclusive (fill in blanks)